manualshive.com logo in svg

Canon iR4570 Series, Service Manual

Share
Download
Canon iR4570 Series Service Manual Download Page 742

E592

0008

Paper trailing 
edge sensor/
registration 
sensor error

Error in light-
receiving 
voltage when 
light is not 
emitted 
(horizontal 
registration 
sensor 3)

Check the paper trailing 
edge sensor. Check the 
horizontal registration 
sensor. Check the punch 
drive PCB. Replace the 
finisher controller PCB.

E592

0009

Paper trailing 
edge sensor/
registration 
sensor error

Error in light-
receiving 
voltage when 
light is not 
emitted 
(horizontal 
registration 
sensor 4)

Check the paper trailing 
edge sensor. Check the 
horizontal registration 
sensor. Check the punch 
driver PCB. Replace the 
finisher controller PCB.

E592

000A

Paper trailing 
edge sensor/
registration 
sensor error

Error in light-
receiving 
voltage when 
light is not 
emitted 
(horizontal 
registration 
sensor 4)

Check the paper trailing 
edge sensor. Check the 
horizontal registration 
sensor. Check the punch 
drive PCB. Replace the 
finisher controller PCB.

E593

0001

Punch shift 
motor error

The light-
receiving 
voltage home 
position sensor 
does not go off 
when light is 
emitted.

Check the horizontal 
registration motor. 
Check the horizontal 
registration home 
position sensor. Check 
the punch driver PCB. 
Replace the finisher 
controller PCB. Check 
the punch shift 
mechanism.

0002

The light-
receiving 
voltage home 
position sensor 
does not go on 
when light is 
not emitted.

Code

Detail 
code

Name

Detection

Remedy

Summary of Contents for iR4570 Series

Page 1: ...Oct 8 2004 Service Manual iR4570 3570 2870 2270 Series Download Free Service Manual And Resetter Printer at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Page 2: ...Download Free Service Manual And Resetter Printer at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Page 3: ...es in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copyright This manual is copyrighted with all rights rese...

Page 4: ...dicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems Indicates an item requiring disconnection of the power plug from the electric outlet Indicates an item intended to provide notes assisting the understanding of the topic in question Indicates an item of reference assisting the understanding of the topic in question Provides a description of a service mode Provides a descr...

Page 5: ...wever differs from circuit to circuit In addition the asterisk as in DRMD indicates that the DRMD signal goes on when 0 In practically all cases the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot be checked in the field Therefore the operations of the microprocessors used in the machines are not discussed they are explained in terms of from sensors to the input of the DC controller PCB and from th...

Page 6: ...Download Free Service Manual And Resetter Printer at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Page 7: ...1 15 1 2 1 2 Cross Section 1 16 1 2 2 Using the Machine 1 19 1 2 2 1 Turning On the Power Switch 1 19 1 2 2 2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch 1 20 1 2 2 3 Control Panel 1 22 1 2 3 User Mode Items 1 23 1 2 3 1 Common Settings 1 23 1 2 3 2 Setting the Time 1 28 1 2 3 3 Adjustments and Cleaning 1 28 1 2 3 4 Report Output 1 28 1 2 3 5 System Control Settings 1 29 1 2 3 6 Copy Settings 1 32 1 2 ...

Page 8: ... 2 3 1Overview 2 23 2 3 2Using the PING Function 2 23 2 3 3Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address 2 23 2 4 Troubleshooting the Network 2 25 2 4 1Overview 2 25 2 4 2Making a Check Using a Loopback Address 2 25 2 4 3Making a Check Using a Local Host Address 2 25 2 5 Checking the Images Operations 2 26 2 5 1Checking the Image Quality and Operation 2 26 2 6 Installing the Card Reader 2 27 2 6 1Poi...

Page 9: ... Image Data for the Fax Reception Function 4 17 4 6 6Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function 4 18 4 7 Parts Replacement Procedure 4 20 4 7 1 Main Controller PCB 4 20 4 7 1 1 Removing the Rear Cover 4 20 4 7 1 2 Removing the Main Controller PCB 4 20 4 7 2 SDRAM 4 21 4 7 2 1 Removing the Face Cover 4 21 4 7 2 2 Removing the SDRAM 4 21 4 7 3 Boot ROM 4 22 4 7 3 1 Removing the Face Cover 4 22 4 7 3 2 ...

Page 10: ...s Replacement Procedure 5 26 5 4 1 Copyboard glass 5 26 5 4 1 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 5 26 5 4 1 2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 5 26 5 4 2 Reader Controller PCB 5 27 5 4 2 1 Before Replacing the Reader Controller PCB 5 27 5 4 2 2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 5 27 5 4 2 3 Removing the rear cover of the machine 5 27 5 4 2 4 Removing the flexible cable cover 5 28 5 4 2 5 Removing the Copyb...

Page 11: ...rning On and off the Laser Light 6 7 6 3 1 2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control 6 8 6 3 2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6 9 6 3 2 1 APC Control 6 9 6 3 3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6 10 6 3 3 1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6 10 6 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 10 6 3 4 1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 10 6 4 Parts Replacement Procedure 6 12 6 4 1 Laser Scanner Unit ...

Page 12: ...21 7 9 1 1 Outline 7 21 7 9 2 Controlling the Transfer Bias 7 21 7 9 2 1 Transfer Roller Bias Control 7 21 7 9 3 Cleaning 7 22 7 9 3 1 Transfer Roller Cleaning Mechanism 7 22 7 9 4 Separation Mechanism 7 22 7 9 4 1 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias 7 22 7 10 Transfer Mechanism 7 23 7 10 1 Transfer Guide Bias 7 23 7 10 1 1 Transfer Guide Bias Control 7 23 7 11 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning 7 24...

Page 13: ... 7 12 4 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 7 45 7 12 4 9 Removing the Left Cover 7 45 7 12 4 10 Removing the Laser Unit 7 45 7 12 4 11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 7 46 7 12 4 12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor 7 47 7 12 4 13 Removing the Sub Hopper 7 48 7 12 5 Developing Assembly 7 49 7 12 5 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 7 49 7 12 5 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 7 50 7 12 5 3 Removing the De...

Page 14: ...8 1 Construction 8 1 8 1 1Specifications Controls and Functions 8 1 8 1 2Division into Blocks 8 2 8 1 3Division into Blocks 8 3 8 1 4Arrangement of Rollers 8 4 8 1 5Arrangement of Rollers 8 5 8 1 6Diagram of Paper Paths printer on its own 8 6 8 1 7Diagram of Paper Paths w copy tray 8 7 8 1 8Diagram of Paper Paths w 3 Way Unit A1 copy tray 8 8 8 1 9Diagram of Paper Paths w Finisher S1 copy tray 8 9...

Page 15: ... 1 2 Removing the Right Door 8 64 8 8 1 3 Removing the Right Door 8 65 8 8 1 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 8 66 8 8 1 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 8 66 8 8 2 Pick up Unit 2 8 67 8 8 2 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 67 8 8 2 2 Removing the Right Cover lower front 8 67 8 8 2 3 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 8 67 8 8 3 Pickup Roller 8 68 8 8 3 1 Removing the Pickup Roller Feed Roller ...

Page 16: ...8 85 8 8 9 Cassette Paper Sensor 8 85 8 8 9 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 85 8 8 9 2 Removing the Right Door 8 85 8 8 9 3 Removing the Right Door 8 86 8 8 9 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 8 87 8 8 9 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 8 88 8 8 9 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 8 88 8 8 9 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 8 88 8 8 9 8 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor 8 89 8 8 10 Cass...

Page 17: ...ght Cover rear 8 109 8 8 15 2 Removing the Right Door 8 109 8 8 15 3 Removing the Right Door 8 111 8 8 15 4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 8 111 8 8 16 Manual Pickup Roller 8 112 8 8 16 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 112 8 8 16 2 Removing the Right Door 8 113 8 8 16 3 Removing the Right Door 8 114 8 8 16 4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 8 115 8 8 16 5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller 8 116 ...

Page 18: ...ight Door 8 135 8 8 23 4 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor 8 136 8 8 24 Duplex Feed Clutch 8 137 8 8 24 1 Removing the Rear Cover 8 137 8 8 24 2 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch 8 137 8 8 25 Delivery Assembly 1 8 138 8 8 25 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 138 8 8 25 2 Removing the Front Cover Unit 8 138 8 8 25 3 Removing the Delivery Tray 8 138 8 8 25 4 Removing the Right Door 8 139 8 8 25 5 Removi...

Page 19: ...e of Paper 9 8 9 4 Protective Functions 9 9 9 4 1Protective Functions 9 9 9 4 2Detecting an Error 9 10 9 5 Parts Replacement Procedure 9 12 9 5 1 Fixing Unit 9 12 9 5 1 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 9 12 9 5 1 2 Removing the Right Door 9 12 9 5 1 3 Removing the Right Door 9 13 9 5 1 4 Removing the Fixing Unit 9 14 9 5 2 Pressure Roller 9 15 9 5 2 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 9 15 9 ...

Page 20: ... 10 3 3Sequence of Operation 10 7 10 4 Power Supply System 10 8 10 4 1 Power Supply 10 8 10 4 1 1 Route of Power Inside the Printer Unit 10 8 10 4 1 2 Power Supply Route in the Reader Unit 10 9 10 4 1 3 Timing of Supply to the Reader Unit 10 10 10 4 1 4 Connections to Various Accessories 10 10 10 4 2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB 10 11 10 4 2 1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supp...

Page 21: ...he Control Panel Frame 10 28 10 5 7 4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 10 28 10 5 8 Control Panel CPU PCB 10 29 10 5 8 1 Removing the Control Panel 10 29 10 5 8 2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 10 30 10 5 8 3 Removing the Controller Panel CPU PCB 10 30 10 5 9 All Night Power Supply PCB 10 30 10 5 9 1 Removing the Rear Cover 10 30 10 5 9 2 Removing the All Night Power Supply PCB 10 ...

Page 22: ... 14 3 Removing the Main Drive Motor 10 51 10 5 14 4 Removing the Main Drive Motor 10 52 10 5 15 Fixing Driver Motor 10 52 10 5 15 1 Removing the Rear Cover 10 52 10 5 15 2 Removing the DC Controller PCB 10 53 10 5 15 3 Removing the Fixing Drive Motor 10 54 10 5 16 Right Door 10 54 10 5 16 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 10 54 10 5 16 2 Removing the Right Door 10 54 10 5 16 3 Removing the Right Doo...

Page 23: ...9 13 3 1After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit 13 9 13 4 Image Formation System 13 10 13 4 1After Replacing the Developing Unit 13 10 13 4 2After Replacing the Drum Unit APVC correction 13 10 13 5 Electrical Components 13 11 13 5 1After Replacing the HDD 13 11 13 5 2After Replacing the DC Controller PCB 13 11 13 5 3After Replacing the Main Controller PCB 13 11 13 5 4After Replacing the Reader Cont...

Page 24: ...itting Diodes LED and Check Pins by PCB 14 35 14 3 8 1 Variable Resistors VR Light Emitting Diodes and Check Pins by PCB 14 35 14 3 8 2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker 14 36 14 3 8 3 All Night Power Supply PCB 14 36 Chapter 15 Self Diagnosis 15 1 Error Code Table 15 1 15 1 1Error Code 15 1 15 2 Error Code Details 15 4 15 2 1Error Code Details 15 4 15 2 2E602 in Detaill 15 18 15 3 Error Co...

Page 25: ...ent Mode 16 34 16 4 1 COPIER 16 34 16 4 1 1 Copier List 16 34 16 4 2 FEEDER 16 44 16 4 2 1 FEEDER List 16 44 16 4 3 SORTER 16 45 16 4 3 1 Sorter List 16 45 16 5 FUNCTION Operation Inspection Mode 16 46 16 5 1 COPIER 16 46 16 5 1 1 Copier List 16 46 16 5 2 FEEDER 16 59 16 5 2 1 Feeder List 16 59 16 6 OPTION Machine Settings Mode 16 63 16 6 1 COPIER 16 63 16 6 1 1 Copier List 16 63 16 6 2 FEEDER 16 ...

Page 26: ...Contents Chapter 17 Service Tools 17 1 Special Tools 17 1 17 2 Oils and Solvents 17 2 Download Free Service Manual And Resetter Printer at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Page 27: ...Chapter 1 Introduction Download Free Service Manual And Resetter Printer at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Page 28: ...Download Free Service Manual And Resetter Printer at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Page 29: ...2 2 Using the Machine 1 19 1 2 2 1 Turning On the Power Switch 1 19 1 2 2 2 When Turning Off the Main Power Switch 1 20 1 2 2 3 Control Panel 1 22 1 2 3 User Mode Items 1 23 1 2 3 1 Common Settings 1 23 1 2 3 2 Setting the Time 1 28 1 2 3 3 Adjustments and Cleaning 1 28 1 2 3 4 Report Output 1 28 1 2 3 5 System Control Settings 1 29 1 2 3 6 Copy Settings 1 32 1 2 3 7 Transmission Reception Setting...

Page 30: ...Contents 1 2 7 3 Types of Paper 1 49 Download Free Service Manual And Resetter Printer at http printer1 blogspot com ...

Page 31: ...tapling punching is needed delivery accessory system configuration 1 if delivery processing is limited to stapling punching delivery accessory system configuration 2 if delivery processing is limited to 3 way delivery delivery accessory system configuration 3 1 1 2 Delivery Accessory System Configuration 1 0006 6221 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following shows a typical system configuration of ...

Page 32: ...llation Procedure Installation of the Finisher Q4 Installation of the Buffer Path Unit 4 3 Punch Unit L1 M1 N1 P1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Punch Unit L1 M1 N1 P1 4 Buffer Path Unit E1 4a Instruction Sheet indicating references 5 3 Way Unit A1 5a Installation Procedure Installation of the 3 Way Unit A1 6 2a 1a 3a 6a 4a 5a 1 3 4 2 5 ...

Page 33: ...pply P2 needed when installing 1 through 4 standard with 120 230V model 6a Installation Procedure Installation of the Accessories Power Supply P2 Function provided Accessory needed 3 way delivery stapling Finisher Q3 or Saddle Finisher Q4 Accessories Power Supply P2 Buffer Path Unit E1 3 Way Unit A1 Function provided Accessory needed saddle binding Saddle Finisher Q4 Accessories Power Supply P2 Bu...

Page 34: ...Way Unit A1 3 Copy Tray J1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Copy Tray J1 4 Accessories Power Supply P2 needed when installing 1 standard with 120 230V model 4a Installation Procedure Installation of the Accessories Power Supply P2 5 Inner Puncher Kit Q1 R1 S1 T1 5a Installation Procedure Installation of the Inner Puncher Kit Q1 R1 S1 T1 6 Finisher Additional Tray B1 6a Installation Pr...

Page 35: ...odels 120V all model 230V iR4570 iR3570 Function provided Accessory needed 2 way delivery stapling Finisher S1 Accessories Power Supply P2 3 Way Unit A1 Copy Tray J1 Function provided Accessory needed 3 way delivery stapling Finisher S1 Accessories Power Supply P2 3 Way Unit A1 Finisher Additional Tray B1 Copy Tray J1 Function provided Accessory needed punching Finisher S1 Accessories Power Supply...

Page 36: ...pical system configuration 1 Inner 2 Way Tray D1 1a Installation Procedure Installation of the Inner 2 Way Tray D1 2 3 Way Unit A1 powered by the printer unit not requiring the Accessories Power Supply P2 2a Installation Procedure Installation of the 3 Way Unit A1 3 Copy Tray J1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Copy Tray J1 3a 3 1a 2a 2 1 ...

Page 37: ...2 Platen Cover Type H 3 Original Holder J1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Original Holder J1 4 Side Paper Deck Q1 4a Installation Procedure Installation of the Side Paper Deck Q1 5 Card Reader C1 Card Reader Mounting Kit B1 9 9a 1a 4a 10a 8a 6a 6 1 2 4 5 8 7 10 3 ...

Page 38: ...100V 8 Envelope Cassette Attachment C1 115 200V 8a Installation Procedure Installation of the Envelope Cassette Attachment C1 9 Accessories Power Supply P2 required when installing the Side Paper Deck Q1 4 standard with 120 230V model 9a Installation Procedure Installation of the Accessories Power Supply P2 10 DADF Handle A1 10a Installation Procedure Installation of the DADF Handle A1 1 Reader He...

Page 39: ...1 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the printer unit Installation of the Reader Heater Unit B1 1 Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the printer unit A Heater PCB C1 is needed for operation 2 Heater PCB C1 2a Installation Procedure Installation of the Heater PCB C1 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the printer unit Installation to the Reader ...

Page 40: ...installation to the printer unit Installation of the Reader Heater Unit B1 2 Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the cassette pedestal Its operation requires the installation of the Heater PCB C1 and the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 3 Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 25 Inst...

Page 41: ...Heater PCB C1 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the printer unit Installation of the Reader Heater Unit B1 2 Cassette Heater Unit 25 Its operation requires the installation of the Heater PCB C1 and the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 2a Installation Procedure Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 29 Not used for mounting this unit to this model 3 Cassette Heater Mounti...

Page 42: ...230 V model 3 Multi PDL Printer Kit E1 N BootROM 4 Expansion Bus B1 5 USB Application Interface Board D1 6 iR256MB Expansion RAM B1 standard with 120V model 7 iR Security Kit A2 License 8 Super G3 Fax Board Q1 3a Installation Procedure Installation of the Cassette Heater Mounting Kit B1 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 25 Installation of the Cassette Heater Unit 29 installation to the cass...

Page 43: ...smission Optional Functions 230 V model The following is a brief explanation of the functions expected of the accessories for details see the chapters that follow T 1 16 UFR II print function UFR II Printer Kit E3 P BootROM UFR II PCL PS print function Multi PDL Printer Kit E1 N BootROM Send function Univrsal Send Kit B1 Fax function 1 line Super G3 Fax Board Q1 Fax function 2 line Multi FAX Board...

Page 44: ...ion and MEAP application operation need for iR256 MB Expansion RAM B1 installed MEAP function H boot N boot memory expansion needed without memory expansion the device will not operate E744 is displayed MEAP application USB connection function USB Application Interface Board D1 Expansion Bus B1 Security function HDD initialization encryption USB Application Interface Board D1 Expansion Bus B1 iR S...

Page 45: ...3 Reader cover front 4 Control panel 5 Support cover right 6 Support cover 7 Delivery tray right cover 8 Delivery tray 9 Inside right cover 10 Front cover unit 11 Cassette 1 12 Cassette 2 13 Left cover lower 14 Left cover 15 Inside base cover 16 Left cover rear 17 Delivery tray rear cover lower 18 Delivery tray rear cover 1 3 2 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 5 4 6 7 9 8 15 17 ...

Page 46: ... 22 Face over iR3570 4570 23 Rear cover 24 Right cover rear 25 Manual feed pickup tray 26 Right cover lower front 27 Right door unit 28 Delivery cover 29 Right cover upper 1 2 1 2 Cross Section 0007 9223 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 iR2270 iR2870 model 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 29 23 28 ...

Page 47: ...Chapter 1 1 17 F 1 12 iR3570 iR4570 model 7 21 22 23 24 27 28 1 2 3 11 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 29 26 5 6 12 25 8 9 10 14 ...

Page 48: ...r cassette 1 5 Drum unit 20 Separation roller cassette 1 6 Drum cleaner assembly 21 Vertical path roller 2 7 Delivery roller 22 Feed roller cassette 2 8 Fixing outlet roller 23 Separation roller cassette 2 9 Fixing film unit 24 Pickup roller cassette 2 10 Pressure roller 25 Primary charging roller 7 21 22 23 24 27 28 1 2 3 11 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 29 26 5 6 12 25 8 9 10 14 ...

Page 49: ...the machine goes on when its main power switch is turned on F 1 14 1 Control panel power switch 11 Duplex feed roller 1 26 Developing assembly 12 Photosensitive drum 27 Laser scanner unit 13 Duplex feed roller 2 28 Dust blocking sheet 14 Transfer roller 29 Sub hopper assembly 15 Registration roller 1 2 3 Display Contrast Guide Reset ON OFF Clear Start Stop Error Main Power 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 ...

Page 50: ...ng Off the Main Power Switch 0007 3160 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Be sure always to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch When Using the Print Function When Receiving or Transmitting a Fax Before using the main power switch check to be sure that the Execute Memory lamp on the control panel is off Turning off the main power switch while an operation is un...

Page 51: ...pter 1 1 21 F 1 16 At Time of Downloading Do not turn off the main power switch while downloading is under way Otherwise the machine may not be able to operate normally C 0 9 Error Main Power Start Memory ...

Page 52: ... 17 1 2 2 3 Control Panel 0007 3163 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 F 1 18 ON OFF 1 2 3 Display Contrast Additional Function ON OFF Clear Error Start Memory Main Power 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 2 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ...

Page 53: ...adjustment dial 5 Stop key 13 User Mode key 6 Start key 14 Help key 7 Main power lamp 15 Touch panel 8 Error lamp Mode Description initial setup select initial function copy transmit Box MEAP use system status screen as initial screen ON OFF give priority to device of system status screen ON OFF select post auto reset function use do not use set order of functions copy transmit Box remote scan or ...

Page 54: ...aper deck plain paper recycled paper colored paper punched paper power consumption at sleep low high select special tray w finisher w No 3 tray tray A host middle tray tray B No 3 tray trayA copy box printer receive fax other trayB copy box printer receive fax other fine setup for receive fax tray A receive fax 1 fax 2 tray B receive fax 1 fax 2 w inner tray tray A host middle tray lower tray B ho...

Page 55: ...C receive fax 1 fax 2 Finisher S1 option tray tray A finisher option tray tray B finisher output tray tray A copy Box printer receive fax other tray B copy Box printer receive fax other fine setup for receive fax tray A receive fax 1 fax 2 tray B receive fax 1 fax 2 Finisher S1 No 3 tray tray A finisher output tray tray B No 3 tray tray A copy Box printer receive fax other tray B copy Box printer ...

Page 56: ...ray tray A copy Box printer receive fax other tray B copy Box printer receive fax other tray C copy Box printer receive fax other fine tune for receive fax tray A fax fax 1 fax 2 tray B receive fax 1 fax 2 tray C receive fax 1 fax 2 if w o fax receive fax receive if fax only receive fax fax fine setup for receive fax only if w fax if fax is 1 line fax 1 fax 2 fax Finisher S1 w o output option spec...

Page 57: ... priority on speed priority on print set standard mode for local print select paper auto cassette 1 through 5 number of prints 1 through 2000 sorter sort group staple sort shift sort shift group rotation sort rotation group punch Z fold duplex on open to right open to top bottom off delete file after print ON OFF merge file ON OFF switch display language ON OFF reverse screen color ON OFF between ...

Page 58: ...cription set time fine in 1 min increments using set auto sleep time 10 15 20 30 40 50 min 1 hr 90 min 2 3 4 hr auto reset time 0 disable 1 2 9 min in 1 min increments set weekly timer 00 00 to 23 59 in 1 min increments everyday from Sun to Sat Mode Description zoom fine adjust XY individually 1 0T to 1 0 in 0 1 increments 0 center bind staple edging w saddle finisher Start key center bind positio...

Page 59: ...automatically every 40 communications print at specified time ON OFF set time 00 00 to 23 59 separate transmission and reception ON OFF toggle fax reception result report only if error ON OFF fax Box reception report list print transmission address book list list print user data list Do you want to print the user data list yes no list print fax user data list Do you want to print the user data lis...

Page 60: ...OFF scan without known ID ON OFF set communications control e mail i fax setup transmission data size upper limit 0 none 1 through 99 MB 3 MB abbreviation name 40 characters attached image full mode transmissions time out 1 to 99 hr 24 hr MDN DSN reception print ON OFF notify always if error ON OFF user server route ON OFF fax setup transmission start speed 33600 bps 14400 bps 9600 bps 7200 bps 48...

Page 61: ...ime setup set 12 numeric characters time zone GMT 12 00 to GMT 12 00 GMT 9 00 daylight saving time ON OFF register LDAP server register detail edit delete print list register license 24 characters set print ON OFF group ID ON OFF date ON OFF character ON OFF MEAP setup use HTTP ON OFF use SSL ON OFF print system info print set device info distribution register recipient auto search register regist...

Page 62: ...recover data user mode settings group ID address book limit reception by function user mode setting ON OFF group ID ON OFF address book ON OFF distribution reception history detail info Mode Description preference key 1 none individual modes preference key 2 none individual modes auto sort ON OFF auto vertical horizontal rotation ON OFF print photo mode ON OFF change standard mode register reset a...

Page 63: ...NE stamp ON OFF toggle register routine task button register edit delete M1 through M9 register Do you want to register yes no name 10 characters x 2 lines max confirm transmission of coded PDF file ON OFF PDF OCR setup original orientation auto detection ON OFF number of OCR characters for file name 1 through 24 initial transmission screen routine task button one touch button new address source r...

Page 64: ... volume control alarm sound level 0 to 8 4 0 to 8 4 off hook alarm ON OFF set fax transmission function ECM transmission ON OFF set pause length 1 to 15 sec 4 to 11 sec 3 to 6 sec auto re dial ON OFF number of redials 100V 1 15 2 120V 1 10 2 230V 1 10 2 intervals for redials min 2 99 2 redial at communication error 1st page and error page all pages off communication mode G4 G3 G3 only check dial t...

Page 65: ...r telephone No 20 characters max register user abbreviation 24 characters max select line type 20 pps 10pps push tone select transmission line line 1 priority on transmission prohibit transmission line 2 priority on transmission prohibit transmission Mode Description set up register user box select box 0 to 99 register box name 24 characters max ID NO 0 to 99999999 file auto delete 0 no 1 2 3 6 12...

Page 66: ...auto error skip skip do not skip secure print delete time length 1 2 3 6 12 24 hr timeout 5 to 300 15 sec disable RIP yes no sorter do not use sort rotation sort rotation group shift sort shift group staple sort punch disable top bottom left right booklet print disable open to left open to right middle bind enable disable transparency interleaf disable white sheet printed sheet print in sets print...

Page 67: ...register name 24 characters register name 24 superscript characters telephone No 120 characters max pause tone backspace space ISDN sub address F Net DT R PIN sub settings Sub Settings F code 20 characters max password 20 characters max ECM transmission ON OFF transmission speed 33600 bps 14400bps 9600 bps 4800 bps international transmission domestic international transmission 1 international tran...

Page 68: ...00dpi file register address register name 24 characters register name 24 superscript characters protocol FTP Windows SMB Netware IPX host name 128 characters path to folder 128 characters user name FTP Netware IPX 24 characters Windows SMB 15 characters password FTP Netware IPX 24 characters Windows SMB 14 characters group register target register name 24 characters register name 24 superscript ch...

Page 69: ... search select from pull down menu LDAP server already registered search condition name 128 characters e mail 128 characters fax 128 characters fine search server to search select from pull down menu LDAP server already registered search conditions name email fax organization organization based including next not including next identical to next not identical to next starts with next ends with nex...

Page 70: ...to check the leakage breaker once or twice a month on a regular basis Be sure also to ask the user to keep a record of checks Inspection Procedure 1 Turn on the main power switch 2 Push he test button 1 of the leakage breaker with the tip of a ball point pen 2 3 Check to make sure that the breaker switch shifts to the OFF side and the power is cut ...

Page 71: ...1 F 1 21 4 Turn off the main power switch 5 Shift the breaker switch 1 back to the ON position F 1 22 If the breaker switch has stopped between ON and OFF be sure to shift it to OFF first and then back to ON F 1 23 ...

Page 72: ...1 2 5 2 CDRH Regulations 0007 3175 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The Center for Devices and Radiological Health of the US Food and Drum Administration put into force regulations concerning laser products on August 2 1976 These regulations apply to laser products manufactured on and after August 1 1976 and the sale of laser products not certified under the regulations is banned within the Untied Stat...

Page 73: ...e into the laser path also remove watches rings and the like before starting the work as they reflect laser light The machine s laser light is red in color and an appropriate label 1 2 is attached to all covers that can reflect laser light Keep also in mind that the machine s laser unit cannot be adjusted in the field F 1 26 1 2 5 4 Safety of Toner 0007 3177 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine...

Page 74: ...sktop Light source type LED array CIS Photosensitive medium OPC drum 30 mm dia Image reading method CCD CIS Reproduction method indirect electrostatic Exposure method by laser light Charging method by AC charging roller Development method 1 component toner projection Transfer method by transfer roller Separation method by curvature static eliminator Cassette pickup method retard Multifeeder pickup...

Page 75: ... less Number of gradations 256 gradations Reading resolution 600 x 600 dpi Copying resolution 1200 dpi equivalent x 600 dpi Printing resolution 2400 dpi equivalent x 600 dpi First print time iR 2270 iR2870 4 9 sec or less iR 3870 iR4570 3 9 sec or less Cassette capacity 550 sheets 80 g m2 Multifeeder tray capacity 50 sheets 80 g m2 Continuous reproduction 1 to 999 Toner level detection function ke...

Page 76: ...idity range 25 to 75 Operating environment atmospheric pressure 0 6 to 1 0 atm Noise iR 2270 iR2870 standby 40 dB in operation 66 dB iR 3870 iR4570 standby 50 dB in operation 71 dB Power supply rating 100 120 230 V Power consumption maximum 1350 W or less Ozone max 0 02 ppm or less avr 0 01 ppm or less Dimensions 565 mm x 700 mm x 761 4 mm WxDxH Weight body 61 6 kg reader unit 8 7 kg ADF 8 5 kg ...

Page 77: ...7 14 7 7 B5 27 22 25 22 7 7 B5R 17 14 17 14 7 7 A4R 17 14 17 14 5 5 B4 24 13 13 4 4 A3 14 14 4 4 STMTR 17 14 17 14 7 7 LTR 28 22 25 22 7 7 LTRR 17 14 17 14 5 5 LGL 13 13 5 5 LDR 14 14 4 4 free 13 Heavy paper A4 25 A5R 13 B5 23 22 B5R 13 A4R 13 B4 11 A3 12 STMTR 13 LTR 25 22 LTRR 13 LGL 11 LDR 12 Postcard 12 8 free 11 OHP A4 25 22 LTR 25 22 ...

Page 78: ... 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry Plain paper A4 45 35 15 25 8 22 7 12 4 A5R 20 16 15 17 14 8 10 8 7 8 7 4 B5 35 15 25 8 17 7 12 4 B5R 20 16 7 17 14 4 10 8 3 8 7 2 A4R 20 16 7 17 14 4 10 8 3 8 7 2 B4 24 16 7 13 4 12 8 3 6 2 A3 22 7 14 4 11 3 7 2 STMTR 20 16 15 17 14 8 10 8 7 8 7 4 LTR 45 35 15 25 8 22 7 12 4 LTRR 20 16 7 17 14 4 10 8 3 8 7 2 LGL 16 14 7 13 4 ...

Page 79: ...3 12 STMTR 14 LTR 25 LTRR 14 LGL 12 LDR 12 Post card 18 10 free 12 OHP A4 25 LTR 25 Envelop e Monarc h 12 8 COM10 12 8 ISO B5 12 8 ISO C5 12 8 DL 12 9 yogata NO 4 12 8 Paper size Single sided Auto duplexing cassette feed manual feed cassette feed manual feed 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry 1 2 dlvry 3 dlvry ...

Page 80: ... Special paper Heavy paper A3 B4 A4R LDR LGL LTRR B5 EXE A5R STMTR B5R A4 LTR yes yes no OHP A4 LTR yes yes no Postcard postcard A6R modified double postcard A5R modified yes no no 4 plane postcard A4 modified yes no no Label paper A4 A4R LTR LTRR yes no no 3 hole paper same as plain yes yes yes Tracing paper A3 B4 A4 yes yes no Envelope Com10 Monarch DL ISO C5ISO B5 yes yes no ...

Page 81: ...Chapter 2 Installation ...

Page 82: ......

Page 83: ...rts 2 28 2 2 11 If Not Connected to a Network 2 32 2 3 Checking the Connection to the Network 2 33 2 3 1 Overview 2 33 2 3 2 Using the PING Function 2 33 2 3 3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address 2 33 2 4 Troubleshooting the Network 2 35 2 4 1 Overview 2 35 2 4 2 Making a Check Using a Loopback Address 2 35 2 4 3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address 2 35 2 5 Checking the Images Operati...

Page 84: ......

Page 85: ...ine must not be installed near a source of fire or in an area subject to dust or ammonium gas If the area is exposed to direct rays of the sun provide curtains to the window 4 The room must be well ventilated The level of ozone generated by the machine in use will not affect the individuals around it However some may find its odor to be unpleasant as when working in a poorly ventilated room 5 The ...

Page 86: ...ath Unit E1 and Puncher Unit L1 M1 N1 P1 Installed F 2 4 7 The machine must be placed in a well ventilated area It is important to make sure however that the machine is not near the air vent for suction of the room 1 035 mm 100 mm min 1 158 mm 1 087 mm 1 228 mm 1 371 mm 1 553 mm 100 mm min 1 015 mm 182 mm 2 091 mm 107 mm 1 983 mm 1 169 mm 100 mm min ...

Page 87: ...o that the machine is fully used to the site temperature thus avoiding image faults caused by condensation The term condensation refers to the formation of droplets of water on the surface of a metal object brought in from a cold to warm place i e as the result of the rapid cooling of the moisture vapor around the object 2 The machine weighs a maximum of about 80 kg including a DADF Be sure to wor...

Page 88: ...r bottle 230V CA model only 1p c 10 Size label small ADF standard model only 1pc 3 Lower right cover 1p c 11 Shut Down Warning Label 2pc 4 Adjusting screw 2p c 12 Toner Bottle Warning Label 1pc 5 covering rubber 1p c 13 Stamp DADF standard model only 1pc ...

Page 89: ...book case 1p c 14 Power Cable 1pc 7 Reversing Guide iR3570 4570 model only 1p c 15 Ferrite core 1pc 8 Cassette size label 1p c Operators manual Users Guide Operators manual CD ROM MEAP Admin CD ROM Operators manual Reference Guide Operators manual Copying Mail Box Function Guide Operators manual Easy Operation Guide Operators manual CD ROM NW RUI Guide MEAP Admin CD ROM ...

Page 90: ... right 6 Support cover 7 Delivery tray right cover 8 Delivery tray 9 Inside right cover 10 Front cover unit 11 Cassette 1 12 Cassette 2 13 Left cover lower 14 Left cover 15 Inside base cover 16 Left cover rear 17 Delivery tray rear cover lower 18 Delivery tray rear cover 1 3 2 10 11 12 13 14 16 18 5 4 6 7 9 8 15 17 ...

Page 91: ...right 20 Copyboard glass 21 Reader cover rear 22 Face over 23 Rear cover 24 Right cover rear 25 Manual feed pickup tray 26 Right cover lower front 27 Right door unit 28 Delivery cover 29 Right cover upper 19 20 21 22 24 25 26 27 29 23 28 ...

Page 92: ...le Memo When placing the copier on the cassette pedestal be sure to align the two positioning pins 1 to the holes on the base plate of the copier F 2 9 4 Close the right door of the pedestal in the case of the 2 cassette Pedestal Y2 5 Remove the packaging tapes and materials from each unit Front door Right door Manual feeder unit Cassettes 1 and 2 Inside the cassettes 1 and 2 DADF In the case of t...

Page 93: ...on of the arrow F 2 12 If you turn on the machine without detaching the fixing assembly release cover the fixing heater can suffer damage 10 Close the right door 2 2 2 Installing the Toner Bottle 0007 4955 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the front cover 1 F 2 13 2 Lift the lock lever 1 F 2 14 3 Unpack the toner bottle and remove the cap 1 F 2 15 4 Mount the toner bottle 1 on the copier ...

Page 94: ... horizontal otherwise no supply of toner will be made 2 2 3 Installing the Drum Unit 0006 6766 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the two screws 1 and detach the front cover unit 2 as sliding it to the left F 2 18 2 Remove the waste toner box 1 F 2 19 3 Open the right door 1 F 2 20 4 Remove the lock screw 1 of the developing assembly pressure lever ...

Page 95: ... 23 F 2 24 7 Remove the package of the drum unit which is provided with the product and remove the two drum pressure release blocks 1 F 2 25 Do not touch the photosensitive drum surface Do not expose the photosensitive drum surface to light for a long period of time Do not touch the rowel of the drum 8 Mount the drum unit 1 which is provided with the product to the copier ...

Page 96: ...which the dummy drum has been secured F 2 28 10 Push down the developing assembly pressure lever 1 and apply pressure F 2 29 11 Secure the developing assembly pressure lever with the one screw 1 F 2 30 12 Close the right door 13 Mount the waste toner box 1 F 2 31 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle ...

Page 97: ...nit 3 with the two screws 2 and mount the covering rubber 1 which is provided with the product F 2 33 Reference Mounting the Front Cover 1 Fit the 2 claws 2 of the front cover unit 1 into the claw holes 3 of the machine F 2 34 2 While matching the top 4 of the front cover unit against the machine fit the lower left claw 2 of the front cover unit 1 in the claw hole 3 of the machine F 2 35 3 While m...

Page 98: ...cassettes 1 and 2 and tighten the adjusting screws 1 at the base plate temporarily until the screw legs touch the bottom slightly F 2 38 2 Check if the machine wobbles while it is lying on the desk or the floor and tighten the adjusting screws if necessary When it wobbles in the direction shown by the arrow A tighten the screw at the right side in the above picture When it wobbles in the direction...

Page 99: ...trol panel power switch for 3 sec or more 2 Go through the instructions for the shut down sequence shown on the display so that the main power switch may be turned off 3 Turn off the main power switch 2 2 6 Stirring Toner 0007 5062 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Enter the Service Mode Press first and 2 and 8 at the same time and then 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL TONER S 3 Press the OK key Toner...

Page 100: ...in reference to the installation procedure of the cassette pedestal 2 2 8 APVC Correction of the Drum 0007 5071 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Enter the Service Mode Press first and 2 and 8 at the same time and then 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION DPC D GAMMA 3 Press the OK key Paper is fed from the cassette 1 regardless of size of paper in the cassette If there is no paper in the cassette 1 paper is fed ...

Page 101: ...ase of a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 open its right door 1 3 Open the lower right cover 2 and remove the 2 screws to detach the cover lower right front F 2 45 4 Take out the cassettes 1 and 2 5 Check the position of the index 1 on the adjusting plate F 2 46 Adjusting the Cassette 1 6 Remove the 2 claws 2 and detach the grip right front 1 in the direction of the arrow F 2 47 7 Loosen the fixing screw 2 ...

Page 102: ...he left margin L1 of the image F 2 50 F 2 51 1 Paper feed direction 8 Tighten the fixing screw 9 Fit the cassette 2 back in 10 Make a copy and check to see that the left margin of the image on paper picked up from the cassette 2 is 2 5 1 5 mm 11 Attach the right front cover of the machine If the left margin on paper picked up from the manual feeder is not as indicated make the following adjustment...

Page 103: ...er feed direction 3 If not as indicated change the small paper 2nd side horizontal registration setting small paper service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REF An increase of 1 will increase the left margin of the image by 0 1 mm 4 Enter the new value obtained as the result of the foregoing adjustment as the large paper 2nd side horizontal registration setting Large paper service mode COPIER ADJUS...

Page 104: ...ch the holder to the bottom plate of the pedestal F 2 57 Locations where the service book folder cannot be attached Inside the machine Inner side of the front cover Locations where the louver is blocked Locations where the grips are blocked Memo Attach the service book holder to the left cover of the machine if the pedestal is not installed Lower right cover 1 Attach the lower right cover 1 Perfor...

Page 105: ...sible The harness must be wound around the ferrite core once before the core is fixed in place The harness is not trapped by the ferrite core F 2 62 When installing the machine newly or when replacing the harness be sure not to leave behind the ferrite core Reversing Guide iR3570 4570 model only 1 Fit the reversing guide 1 F 2 63 2 2 11 If Not Connected to a Network 0007 6496 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 ...

Page 106: ...system setup network Ethernet driver setup auto detect ...

Page 107: ...e mode COPIER TEST NETWORK PING 2 Enter the correct IP address using the control panel keypad and press the OK key 3 Press the Start key If successful the indication will be OK If the attempt fails however NG will be indicated F 2 64 1 Result OK NG 2 IP address input 2 3 3 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address 0007 5603 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 You can use a remote host address in combinat...

Page 108: ...ppropriate remote host address 3 Enter the remote host address for PING 4 If the result is OK the connection to the network is correct 5 If the result is NG the connection to the network is not correct start the following troubleshooting work ...

Page 109: ...e loopback address 127 0 0 1 for PING If NG check the machine s TCP IP setting once again and execute PING once again If OK go to the next check 2 4 3 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address 0007 5614 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 A local host address is the IP address of the machine When you execute PING using the address it will return after it has reached the network controller so that you will...

Page 110: ...ny copies as specified are made normally 2 Make settings e g date time to suit the needs of the user 3 Start service mode press the User Mode key press the 2 and 8 keys at the same time press the User Mode key once again 4 Make specifications related settings to suit the needs of the user COPIER OPTION USER 5 Make test prints by making the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC ...

Page 111: ...70 iR2870 The card reader must be used in combination with the Card Reader Mounting Kit B1 2 6 2 Checking the Contents 0007 2707 iR2270 iR2870 Card Reader C1 T 2 4 F 2 66 Card Reader Mounting Kit B1 1 Card Reader C1 1 pc 2 RS tightening screw M4x10 1 pc 3 Toothed washer 1 pc C 1 2 3 ...

Page 112: ...ed upon insertion Be sure to go through the following steps on the host machine before starting the work 1 Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more 2 Go through the shutdown sequence as instructed on the screen so that you may turn off the main power switch 3 Turn off the main power switch 4 Disconnect the power cable from the wall outlet 1 Card reader base 1 pc 2 Relay harness 1...

Page 113: ...ght door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right cover 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 2 69 4 Remove the face plate 2 from the right cover rear 1 using nippers 4 3 2 1 ON OFF 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 114: ...or of the host machine F 2 71 6 Mount the rear right cover using 4 screws 7 Mount the card reader 1 and the card reader base 2 using the included TP screw M4x8 4 Be sure to use the washer 3 when doing so F 2 72 8 Route the relay cable 2 through the wire saddle 1 1 2 ...

Page 115: ... will not be trapped mount the card reader 1 using a TP screw 4x25 3 fitted with a washer 2 F 2 75 11 Connect the power cable to the wall outlet and turn on the main power switch See that the machine is in a standby state and start service mode 12 Make the following selections in the machine s service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD then 1 2 ...

Page 116: ...control then see that the following numbers are available ID00000001 to ID00001000 If you entered 1 in service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CARD 2 Make the following selections in user mode system setup network setup TCP IP setup IP address Set the following IP address gateway address subnet mask Unless you have set system control group ID and system control ID No you will not be able to execute r...

Page 117: ...achine has properly been installed before starting the work 3 be sure to disconnect the power plug of the host machine before starting the work 4 be sure to identify the screws by type length diameter and location 5 be sure the settings data are ready on the PC at the service station 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 of the top cover 1 and detach the cover F 2 76 2 Connect the connector 1 of the power suppl...

Page 118: ...nded for an NE controller F 2 79 5 Secure the controller 1 to the host machine s rear cover using 4 screws 2 F 2 80 6 Take up the slack from the cable connecting the host machine and the controller bundle the excess length on the controller side and fix it in place using a harness guide 1 ...

Page 119: ...he controller will be IPC F 2 82 8 If IC6 1 is found on the PCB shift bit 7 of the DIP swish 2 SW2 7 to ON otherwise shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 SW2 7 to OFF F 2 83 1 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 1 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 2 1 ...

Page 120: ...ansmission level to 16 dBm ON OFF sets the modem signal transmission level to 14 dBm SW3 1 see right OFF ON sets the modem signal transmission level to 12 dBm SW3 2 ON ON sets the modem signal transmission level to 10 dBm SW3 3 OFF keep at OFF at all times SW3 4 ON selects push pulse for controller line setting OFF selects dial pulse for controller line setting SW3 5 ON selects 20PPS for dial puls...

Page 121: ... Set the bits of the DIP switch 1 SW 2 on the PC as indicated in the table then press the push switch 2 A press on the push switch 2 SW4 will causes LED5 3 red to go on T 2 7 bits of SW2 Setting SW2 1 OFF SW2 2 OFF SW2 3 ON SW2 4 ON SW2 5 OFF SW2 6 OFF SW2 7 See step 9 SW2 8 OFF LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 1 ...

Page 122: ...n press the push switch 2 SW4 A press on the push switch 2 SW4 will cause LED5 3 red to go off indicating that the RAM has been initialized T 2 8 bits of SW2 Setting SW2 1 OFF SW2 2 OFF SW2 3 OFF SW2 4 ON SW2 5 OFF SW2 6 ON SW2 7 See step 9 SW 8 OFF LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 1 2 3 ...

Page 123: ...o the connector 1 LINE of the controller If you are using the extension function connect the existing telephone or fax to the connector 2 TEL and connect the telephone line to the connector 1 LINE of the controller LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW2 1 2 3 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 LED4 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 1 2 3 4 5...

Page 124: ...ind out if the controller is capable of placing a telephone call to the PC in the service station Press the push switch 1 SW4 on the PCB A press on the push switch 1 SW4 will cause LED6 2 red to go on when the transmission is done LED6 2 red will go off If it has failed LED6 2 red will start to flash A press on the push switch 1 SW4 while LED6 2 is flashing will start transmission once again A pre...

Page 125: ...tings label 1 on the top cover of the controller and record the settings of the switches 21 Secure the top cover 2 of the controller in place using 2 screws 3 When doing so check to be sure that the cable of the power supply unit is held in place by the cable guide inside the controller and is not trapped by the top cover 2 LED1 LED2 LED3 2 1 LED5 LED6 IC6 SW1 SW4 SW3 6 1 BAT1 CN4 1 2 CN3 CN2 SW2 ...

Page 126: ...F 2 94 3 2 3 1 ...

Page 127: ...Chapter 3 Basic Operation ...

Page 128: ......

Page 129: ...Contents Contents 3 1 Construction 3 1 3 1 1 Functional Construction 3 1 3 1 2 Major PCB Wiring diagram 3 2 3 2 Basic Sequence 3 5 3 2 1 Basic Sequence of Operation at Power On 3 5 ...

Page 130: ......

Page 131: ...nter control system laser exposure system image formation system pickup feed system fixing delivery system For detailed discussions of the individual blocks see the chapters that follow F 3 1 T 3 1 A General Control System 1 HDD main controller PCB 2 accessories PCB B Original Exposure System 3 photosensitive drum C reader Control System 4 charging reader controller PCB 5 developing A MN CON D DC ...

Page 132: ...s a wiring diagram showing the relationship among major PCBs D Printer Control System 6 transfer DC controller PCB 7 fixing E Laser Exposure System 8 delivery reversal duplex assembly F Image Formation System 9 pickup control G Fixing Delivery System 10 cassette 1 H Pickup Feed System 11 cassette 2 ...

Page 133: ...roller PCB 13 Laser drive PCB 6 DC controller PCB 14 Cassette size relay PCB 7 High voltage PCB 15 Upper cassette size PCB J502 J1113 J511 J1018A J1018B J211 J219 J218 J216 J217 J212 J404 J1021 J203 J640 J210 J3130 J1303 J1302 J254 J250 J1020 J1027 J603 J3129 J831 J3128 J1110 J1111 J6801 J6802 J301 J315 J310 J321 J311 J307A J318 J316 J501 J1301 J647 J832 1 2 3 4 5 11 9 10 8 14 15 16 7 6 12 13 J601...

Page 134: ...Chapter 3 3 4 Memo The arrows in the diagram indicate the wring between PCBs and do not indicate the direction of individual signals 8 AC drive PCB 16 Lower cassette size PCB ...

Page 135: ... position the lifter is moved up until the top of the stack of sheets is detected reverse forward Shading correction Main power switch ON SREADY STBY Reader motor M501 LED CIS HP sensor PS503 LED intensity adjustment when lit in each color CIS output gain adjustment when lit in all colors Shading position CIS output offset correction Shading position Shading position CIS output offset correction ...

Page 136: ......

Page 137: ...Chapter 4 Main Controller ...

Page 138: ......

Page 139: ...Image Data 4 15 4 6 1 Flow of Image Data According to Copy Functions 4 15 4 6 2 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function 4 15 4 6 3 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function 4 16 4 6 4 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Transmission 4 17 4 6 5 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function 4 17 4 6 6 Flow of Image Data for the PDL Function 4 18 4 7 Parts Replacement Procedure 4 20 4 7 1 Main Controll...

Page 140: ......

Page 141: ...ory printer unit output image processing printer unit image input processing rendering color LCD controller card printer unit interface fax image processing etc SRAM Retains service mode settings by SRAM HDD management information Image memory SDRAM Temporarily retains image data 256 MB 512 MB max BOOTROM Stores boot program HDD Stores system software retains image data for Box Fax function 20 GB ...

Page 142: ...F 4 1 Main controller PCB USB port Riser board Boot ROM SRAM Ethernet 10 100BASE T Hard disk drive DC controller PCB Reader unit Image memory SDRAM ...

Page 143: ...oller according to connectors F 4 2 T 4 2 Connector Description J1003 SDRAM connection slot J1004 SDRAM connection slot J1005 Fax connector 2 port J1010 Boot ROM connector slot J1020 J1021 J1059 J1022 IC1001 IC1009 IC1008 IC1084 IC1004 IC1003 IC1100 IC1006 IC1005 IC1010 J1018 J1016 J1004 J1003 IC1002 BATTERY J1060 J1026 J1023 J1062 J1006 J1024 J1029 J1028 J1014 J1030 J1010 J1013 J1061 J1017 J1005 ...

Page 144: ...ernet port 10 100BaseT Partition Description FSTDEV Collects compressed image data TMP_GEN Stores temporary files log data TMP_PSS PDL spool TMP_FAX Ensures fax reception APL_SEND Stores user data address book transfer settings APL_MEAP Stores MEAP applications APL_GEN Mode memory data standard mode data History e g print job history iFax image data Fax image data Other IMG_MNG Stores file managem...

Page 145: ...tions HDD BOOTDEV RUI Remote user interface module HDD BOOTDEV Boot Starts up the machine BootROM DIMM FAX board G3FAX Controls G3 Fax HDD BOOTDEV 1 line Dcon Controls the DC controller DC controller PCB Mask ROM soldered Rcon Controls the printer unit controller Printer unit controller PCB Flash ROM soldered Meapcont Controls MEAP applications HDD BOOTDEV HDD TMP_GEN TMP_PSS FSTDEV APL_SEND APL_M...

Page 146: ...F 4 4 Main controller PCB DC controller PCB HDD Reader unit BOOTDEV BOOTDEV SYSTEM Language RUI MEAP G3FAX DCON RCON BOOT ...

Page 147: ... the image memory DRAM the control panel shows the following screen using a progress bar to indicate the progress of the start up sequence F 4 5 Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is indicated as access is being made to the HDD Turning off the power can cause a fault on the HDD identified by E602 4 3 2 Start Up Sequence 0006 6703 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Boot ROM Area Self Di...

Page 148: ... the system software from the HDD to write it into the image memory SDRAM Image Memory SDRAM Area interval 3 The system software written by the boot program initializes the various functional blocks e g I F settings of the main controller When all the foregoing ends normally the machine becomes ready to accept a job i e the control panel shows the Operation screen and the LED on the Start key chan...

Page 149: ...g execution access for checking Main controller PCB While the Self Diagnosis Program Is Being Executed Image memory SDRAM CPU HDD System area Image data area BootROM Main controller PCB Self diagnosis program Boot program access to the program during execution flow of the system program While the Boot Program Is Being Run System software ...

Page 150: ...eration 0006 8379 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following diagram shows the flow of shut down operation F 4 9 Press on the control panel power switch 3 sec or more HDD protection check mode HDD protection execution mode Main power switch off Indicates the job being executed and informs the user that it will start the shut down sequence Moves to the shut down sequence Cancels any job on wait in p...

Page 151: ...s functions F 4 10 4 5 2 Construction of the Image Processing Module 0006 6706 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine s major image processing is executed by the main controller PCB The following shows the construction of the modules associated with image processing SEND FAX PullScan E Mail PDL Print BOX PC Original Copy A A A Print output Scan Image data Other iR machine ...

Page 152: ...r is processed by the main controller PCB Reader unit SDRAM Reader unit controller PCB HDD Main controller PCB image memory program temporary storage DC controller PCB Processes the image data read by the reader unit Reader unit input image processing block Processes image data for output to the printer unit Printer unit output image processing block ...

Page 153: ...ession extension and editing Film photo mode Binary processing screen processing Binary processing error diffusion To compression expansion editing block Edge emphasis Enlargement reduction Text mode Text photo film photo mode intensify to density conversion density adjustment F adjustment gamma correction Main controller PCB Reader unit ...

Page 154: ...it F 4 14 Main controller PCB to printer unit output image processing block Enlargement reduction Rotation Integration Compression Expansion Printer unit image processing block PDPDL image processing block SDRAM HDD Main controller PCB To DC controller PCB For PDL data when fine line processing is ON Compression expansion editing block Binary density conversion Enlargement reduction Smoothing Thic...

Page 155: ... the Copy Function is in use F 4 15 4 6 2 Flow of Image Data for the Box Function 0006 6747 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following is the flow of image data when the Box function is in use Image processing block for printer unit Image processing block for printer unit Printer unit Main control PCB Data compression Data rotation Data expansion SDRAM HDD DC controller PCB ...

Page 156: ...mage data when the SEND function is in use F 4 17 Image processing block for printer unit Printer unit Main controller PCB Data compression Data rotation SDRAM HDD Image processing block for printer unit Printer unit Main controller PCB Data rotation Data expansion Resolution conversion SDRAM HDD To network compression data Ethernet port ...

Page 157: ...is in use F 4 18 4 6 5 Flow of Image Data for the Fax Reception Function 0006 6751 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following is the flow of image data when the fax reception function is in use Image processing block for reader unit Image processing block for fax Super G3 Fax Board Resolution conversion Main controller PCB Compression Compression Expansion SDRAM HDD Reader unit ...

Page 158: ...2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following is the flow of image data when the PDL function is in use Image processing block for printer unit Image processing block for fax Super G3 Fax Board Main controller PCB Data compression Data rotation Data expansion SDRAM HDD DC controller PCB ...

Page 159: ...F 4 20 Rendering processing block Compression expansion editing block Processing block for printer unit DC controller PCB Main controller PCB SDRAM HDD Ethernet PDL ...

Page 160: ...rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 4 21 4 7 1 2 Removing the Main Controller PCB 0007 6417 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 4 22 Freeing the Flexible Cable To free the flexible cable 1 shift up the lock first as shown F 4 23 2 Remove the 9 screws 1 and detach the main controller PCB 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 161: ...w main controller PCB 1 Boot ROM 2 Hard disk 3 SDRAM 4 FRAM F 4 25 4 7 2 SDRAM 4 7 2 1 Removing the Face Cover 0007 6411 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 2 Loosen the 2 screws 2 F 4 26 3 Pull off the face cover 1 in upward direction F 4 27 4 7 2 2 Removing the SDRAM 0007 6412 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Release the 2 locking levers 1 and detach the SDRAM 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 162: ... the 2 screws 2 F 4 29 3 Pull off the face cover 1 in upward direction F 4 30 4 7 3 2 Removing the Boot ROM 0007 6414 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Push the locking lever 1 and detach the boot ROM 2 F 4 31 4 7 4 HDD 4 7 4 1 Removing the Face Cover 0007 6409 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 2 Loosen the 2 screws 2 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 163: ... 7 4 2 Removing the Counter PCB 0008 2478 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the counter PCB 2 F 4 34 4 7 4 3 Removing the HDD 0007 6410 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the HDD 2 in the direction of the arrow F 4 35 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 164: ......

Page 165: ...Chapter 5 Original Exposure System ...

Page 166: ......

Page 167: ...g Direction 5 14 5 3 4 Detecting the Size of Originals 5 16 5 3 4 1 Outline 5 16 5 3 4 2 Outline of Size Identification 5 17 5 3 5 Dirt Sensor Control 5 19 5 3 5 1 Outline 5 19 5 3 6 Image Processing 5 22 5 3 6 1 Outline 5 22 5 3 6 2 CCD Drive 5 23 5 3 6 3 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output 5 23 5 3 6 4 A D Conversion of the CCD Output 5 24 5 3 6 5 Shading Correction outline 5...

Page 168: ...ar Cover 5 45 5 4 5 2 Removing the Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor front rear 5 46 5 4 6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor 5 47 5 4 6 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 5 47 5 4 6 2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 5 48 5 4 6 3 Removing the Contract Sensor Home Position Sensor 5 49 5 4 7 Original Size Sensor 5 50 5 4 7 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 5 50 5 4 7 2 Removing the Copyboard Glass 5 51 5 4 7 3 Rem...

Page 169: ...ntact image sensor CIS fixed in position Read resolution 600 main scanning x 600 sub scanning dpi Gradation 256 Scanning speed in ADF mode 45 ipm single sided A4 LTR Carriage position detection by contact image sensor CIS HP sensor PS503 Magnification 25 to 400 Main Scanning Direction by main controller PCB image processing Sub Scanning Direction in book mode by changing carriage travel speed by p...

Page 170: ...imum original read width 304 mm CIS drive control by reader motor M501 Original size identification 1 Book Mode in main scanning direction by reflection type sensor AB Inch in sub scanning direction by reflection type sensor AB Inch 2 ADF Mode width by original width value in ADF length by photo sensor in ADF The particulars of control differ depending on the selected magnification For details see...

Page 171: ...ocessing 3 Original sensor 3 PS506 helps identify original size for all destinations 4 Original sensor 4 PS507 helps identify original size AB Inch AB 5 Original sensor 5 PS508 helps identify original size Inch A 6 Reader motor M501 pulse motor controls the drive of the carriage 7 Reader heater prevents condensation on the copyboard glass 8 Original sensor 1 PS504 helps identify original size AB I...

Page 172: ...to ADF 5 Reader controller PCB 6 Reader motor drive control 10 Contact image sensor CIS uses LEDs for indirect exposure LED photoconducting body 11 CIS HP sensor PS503 photo interrupter detects CIS home position 12 Cupboard cover open closed sensor PS502 ends original size identification with the copyboard cover at 5 deg Optional 100 230 V model only Item Notation Description J 5 0 0 J 5 0 1 J 5 0...

Page 173: ...2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine s reader controller PCB has the following functional construction F 5 3 T 5 3 Jack No Description J500 supplies power to the ADF J501 receives power from the machine body printer unit J502 communication with the machine body printer unit J503 communication with the ADF DC24V DC13V J500 J501 J503 J502 J504 J510 J508 J505 J506 J512 IC520 IC518 IC519 IC529 IC530 IC531 I...

Page 174: ...rd cover open closed sensor connects to the CIS HP sensor J507 connects to original sensor 1 original sensor 2 J508 connects to original sensor 3 original sensor 4 J510 connects to the contact image sensor CIS J512 for use at factory J513 for use at factory Jack No Description ...

Page 175: ...R3570 iR4570 reverse forward Shading correction Main power switch ON SREADY STBY Reader motor M501 LED CIS HP sensor PS503 LED intensity adjustment when lit in each color CIS output gain adjustment when lit in all colors Shading position CIS output offset correction Shading position Shading position CIS output offset correction Shading position Original leading edge 1 CIS position check 2 Shading ...

Page 176: ...orrection Copy board read start position Only if 1 sec or more has passed since previous rotation Shading position Shading position Shading position Original trailing edge Copyboard glass read start position 1 CIS position check 2 After shading correction move to start position 4 Move to standby point 3 Original scan 1 Only if 1 min or more has passed since previous rotation 1 Shading position Ori...

Page 177: ...n Original trailing edge SREADY Shading position Shading position Shading position Shading position Only if 1 min or more passed since previous rotation Shading position Stream reading start position 2 Original scan 1 CIS position check 1 1 1 Only if 1 min or more has passed since previous rotation CIS HP sensor HP Original glass read start position ...

Page 178: ...P Sensor PS503 Detection Signal checks if the contact image sensor CIS is at home position 3 Copyboard Cover Sensor front PS502 rear PS501 Detection Signal detects the state open close of the copyboard cover 5 3 1 2 Controlling the Reader Motor 0006 5723 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 2 3 forward reverse Sensor light blocking plate Cartridge CIS HP sensor PS503 Reader motor Contact image sensor CIS...

Page 179: ...verse Movement After Scanning an Image After scanning an image the machine moves the contact image sensor CIS to shading position at a specific speed 147 mm sec Reader controller PCB 3 3V 24V OPT_MCK CCW MD_POW M_ENABLE RETURN M_VREF 5V J505 B B A A CPU Motor driver 1 2 3 4 M501 Start position Acceleration Original leading edge Normal speed Original trailing edge Deceleration Stop Shift speed Shif...

Page 180: ... image and the image is read on a line by line basis T 5 4 Item Description LED serves as the source of light used to expose the original Light guide directs the light from LEDs to the entire length of a single image line of the original Rod lens array collects light reflected by the original CCD array collects the reflected light coming through the rod lens array ...

Page 181: ... light is then collected by the CCD array the light is converted into an electric signal by the CCD array photo conversion for output The CCD array consists of a total of 8 channels units Each channel possesses its own output correction table used to process an input intensity signal for gain correction for output of an image signal Light guide Light guide LED CCD LED Rod lens array Light guide LE...

Page 182: ...N BODY CCD LUT for CCD gain correction COPIER FUNCTION CCD LUT ADJ2 using the D 10 Chart 5 3 3 Enlargement Reduction 5 3 3 1 Changing the Magnification in Main Scanning Direction 0006 5724 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 In Book Mode ADF Mode The image is read at 100 in main scanning direction and the magnification is varied by processing the data on the main controller PCB 5 3 3 2 Varying the Magnifi...

Page 183: ...ocessed by the reader controller PCB main controller PCB EX for reduction to 25 the original is read at 236 mm sec and the data is processed for 50 reduction skipping for 1 2 by the reader controller PCB and for 50 skipping for 1 2 by the main controller PCB EX for enlargement to 400 the original is read at a speed of 118 mm sec and the data is processed for 200 enlargement doubling by the main co...

Page 184: ...on type sensors when the copyboard cover is closed opened the machine identifies the presence of paper if it does not find a change in the output of the reflection type sensors when the copyboard cover is closed opened The machine uses the following sensors and the sensors are arranged as shown in the following figure for main scanning direction reflection type photosensors AB configuration 2 loca...

Page 185: ...17 LGL B5R Index plate Original sensor 3 Index plate B4 A3 AB Configuration Inch Configuration Original sensor 5 Butting position Butting position Main scanning direction Main scanning direction Sub scanning direction Sub scanning direction Original sensor 1 Original sensor 2 Original sensor 4 Original sensor 3 Original sensor 1 Reader unit Copyboard over Original sensor 3 Copyboard glass Original...

Page 186: ...nd the difference between these 2 sets of data is checked If any of the following is true the output of the sensors may not show any change preventing the machine from correctly identifying the size the original is an A3 black original the original is a book its thickness may not allow the copyboard cover to close fully thus preventing the detection of a change in the sensor level the copyboard co...

Page 187: ...nly when the ADF is in use and in addition is closed Timing of Control at the end of a job between sheets for each reading of a sheet at the start of a job only when any of the following conditions is true 1st job after power on dust detected at all points of detection at the end of the previous job dust detection failed to end normally at the end of the previous job e g ADF opened Original sensor...

Page 188: ...sition for the next job For control at the end of a job if an original is placed in the ADF with dust detected at all points A B C the machine will indicate a message on its control panel to prompt cleaning of the glass surface The Start key will remain invalid until this message is cleared At the Start of a Job dust bypass Presence of dust is detected at points A B and C in this order in the same...

Page 189: ... T 5 7 F 5 24 Service Mode COPIER OPTION BODY DFDST L1 level 1 used to adjust the dust detection level between sheets COPIER OPTION BODY DFDST L2 level 1 used to adjust the dust detection level at the end of a job Point Discription A read reference position B about 0 5 mm from the reference position to the inner side of the roller C about 1 0 mm from the reference position to the inner side of the...

Page 190: ...log Image Processing CCD drive CCD output gain correction offset correction CCD output A D conversion 2 Digital Image Processing shading correction CCD number of lines 1 Number of pixels Total 7488 Number of effective pixels 7180 size of pixel 32 x 46 9 ym Shading correction shading correction executed for each job shading adjustment executed at power on Reader controller PCB CCD drive analog imag...

Page 191: ... iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The analog video signal generated by the CCD is corrected so that it will have a specific level gain correction moreover the output voltage occurring in the absence of incident light is also corrected so that it will have a specific CCD 1 line Analog image signal Analog image processing gain correction offset correction A D conversion CCD drive control CCD control sign...

Page 192: ...g adjustment executed at power on or shading correction executed for each job 5 3 6 6 Shading Adjustment 0006 5937 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 In this adjustment the machine measures the density of the standard while plate and stores the results in memory as density data It then performs computations on the shading data and uses the result as the target value for shading correction 5 3 6 7 Shading...

Page 193: ...F 5 28 CCD output Original density Standard white plate Characteristics before correction Target value Measurement Characteristics after correction White ...

Page 194: ... glass 3 F 5 29 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 5 30 5 4 1 2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 0006 9730 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the copyboard glass or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and...

Page 195: ...0 iR3570 iR4570 If an ADF is used be sure to execute P PRINT of service mode to obtain its printout COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 5 4 2 2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0007 0742 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the ADF communications cable 1 if equipped with an ADF F 5 32 2 Open the copyboard cover or the ADF 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the reader rear cover 2 F 5 33 5 4 2 3 Remov...

Page 196: ...moving the Copyboard Glass 0007 3420 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 36 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint...

Page 197: ...ller PCB 0007 0745 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the cover 1 F 5 38 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the flexible cable 2 F 5 39 3 Remove the 8 screws 2 and detach the cover 3 F 5 40 4 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and detach the 3 1 2 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 198: ...the connector 2 F 5 42 6 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 5 43 7 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the cover 2 F 5 44 8 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and free the cable from the wire saddle 2 F 5 45 9 Remove the 2 screws 1 and pull out the reader controller PCB base 2 F 5 46 10 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the reader controller PCB 2 1 3 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 1 1 ...

Page 199: ...reading COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ Y a 3 shading position adjustment fixed reading COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S a 4 main sub scanning direction MTF value COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF MG If the value of the following was not 0 before the replacement of the reader controller PCB COPIER OPTION BODY CCD LUT Set a value other than 0 once again and make the following adjustments using the D 10 Chart COPIER FUNCTIO...

Page 200: ...48 5 4 3 Scanner Motor 5 4 3 1 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0007 3432 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the ADF communications cable 1 if equipped with an ADF F 5 49 2 Open the copyboard cover or the ADF 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the reader rear cover 2 F 5 50 5 4 3 2 Removing the Scanner Motor 0006 9746 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then disconnect the conn...

Page 201: ...ve the 2 screws 1 and detach the copyboard glass retainer right 2 F 5 53 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the copyboard glass retainer left 2 F 5 54 4 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the reader front cover 2 F 5 55 5 4 4 2 Removing the Reader Rear Cover 0007 3433 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the ADF communications cable 1 if equipped with an ADF ...

Page 202: ...R3570 iR4570 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 58 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 203: ...irection of the arrow so that the contact image sensor CIS 2 will move where it is shown in the figure F 5 60 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the plate 2 F 5 61 3 Remove the flexible cable 1 and detach the contact image sensor CIS 2 F 5 62 When detaching the contact sensor unit take care not to touch the light guide assembly and the lens 1 2 ...

Page 204: ...de item COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF MG main scanning direction MTR correction value F 5 65 Be sure also to update the value indicated on the service label found behind the left cover of the reader unit so that it is identical to the value indicated on the CIS label Reference At time of shipment from the factory no CIS label is attached 5 4 5 Copyboard Cover Open Close Sensor 5 4 5 1 Removing the Reader ...

Page 205: ...70 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 and remove the screw 2 then detach the sensor base 3 F 5 68 2 Detach the 2 sensors 1 from the sensor base え F 5 69 5 4 6 Contact Sensor HP Sensor 5 4 6 1 Removing the Copyboard Glass 0007 3439 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3...

Page 206: ...resence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol F 5 71 5 4 6 2 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 0007 3426 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the copyboard glass or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 3 Remove the ADF reading glass 3 ...

Page 207: ...the arrow so that the contact image sensor CIS 2 is where indicated in the figure F 5 73 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the CIS home position sensor 3 When detaching the sensor do so as if to push it under the claw 2 found at the rear F 5 74 After replacing the sensor pull the drive belt rear 1 in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor CIS 2 is returned to the farthes...

Page 208: ...R3570 iR4570 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 78 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistened with alcohol 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 209: ...e Sensor 0006 9774 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the cover 1 F 5 80 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the flexible cable 2 F 5 81 3 Remove the 8 screws 2 and detach the cover 3 F 5 82 4 Free the hook 1 and detach the original sensor 1 2 1 2 1 1 ...

Page 210: ...ass 0007 3423 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the copyboard cover or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 then detach the copyboard glass 3 F 5 85 When removing the copyboard glass take care not to touch the following glass surface standard white plate The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found clean it with lint free paper moistened w...

Page 211: ...5 87 5 4 8 3 Removing the ADF Reading Glass 0007 3427 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the copyboard glass or ADF 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the glass retainer 2 3 Remove the ADF reading glass 3 F 5 88 When removing the ADF reading glass take care not to touch the glass surface The presence of dirt can cause white black lines in the images If dirt is found be sure to clean it using lint ...

Page 212: ...r CIS 2 is where it is indicated in the figure F 5 89 2 Peel the protective sheet 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Free the cable from the wire saddle 3 and remove the screw 4 then detach the reader heater left 5 F 5 90 After replacing the reader heater pull the drive belt rear 1 in the direction of the arrow so that the contact image sensor is returned to the farthest left F 5 91 ...

Page 213: ...Chapter 6 Laser Exposure ...

Page 214: ......

Page 215: ...and off the Laser Light 6 7 6 3 1 2 Main Scanning Synchronous Control 6 8 6 3 2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6 9 6 3 2 1 APC Control 6 9 6 3 3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6 10 6 3 3 1 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor 6 10 6 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 10 6 3 4 1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 10 6 4 Parts Replacement Procedure 6 12 6 4 1 Laser Scanner Unit 6 12 6 4 ...

Page 216: ......

Page 217: ...f laser beams 2 Output 5mW iR2270 iR2870 10mW iR3570 iR4570 Wave length 785 nm 800 nm infrared light Type of motor DC brushless motor Number of revolutions 16000 rpm approx single control iR2270 iR2870 27000 rpm 16000 rpm approx double control iR3570 iR4570 Type of bearing Oil Number of facets 6 40 mm dia Synchronous control Main scanning direction Light intensity control APC Others Laser activati...

Page 218: ...3570 iR4570 The laser exposure system is primarily controlled by the DC controller PCB Laser scanner motor control Laser shutter control Name Description 1 Laser unit Generates laser light 2 Polygon mirror Scans laser light in main scanning direction 3 BD mirror Reflects laser light in the direction of the BD PCB 4 BD PCB Generates the BD signal 1 2 4 3 ...

Page 219: ...2 J318 J601 1 4 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J317 J604 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 J316 J603 1 2 3 PWCHG 5V GND VDO2 GND VDO2 CNT2 CNT1 CNT0 VDO1 GND VDO1 POLYGON FG 24V P ACC P DEC GND 3 3V BD GND ...

Page 220: ...gnal CNT2 Laser driver control signal VDO2 Image data signal input PWCHG Light intensify switchover signal FG PULSE DETECT FG PULSE detecting signal POLYGON FG FG output signal J318 J601 1 4 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J317 J602 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10111213 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 J316 J603 1 2 3 PWCHG 5V GND VDO2 GND VDO2 CNT2 CNT1 CNT0 VDO1 GND VDO1 STAND BY FG PULSE DETECT POLYGON...

Page 221: ...P ACC Motor acceleration signal P DEC Motor deceleration signal BD BD output level single Single Description ...

Page 222: ...otor rotation reaches its target revolution the machine turns on the laser unit Thereafter when the Start key is turned on the machine generates the image request signal PVREQ on the printer side and turns on the laser beam with reference to the generated signal A4 1 Copy F 6 4 PRINT STBY STBY INTR PVREQ BD BD detection APC control ON APC control ON Laser A BD detention APC control ON ...

Page 223: ... turned on and off according to the combination of laser control signals CNT0 1 2 from the DC controller PCB T 6 7 Laser control signal Laser status CNT2 CNT1 CNT0 Laser A Laser B 0 1 0 ON for APC control OFF 0 1 1 OFF OFF 0 0 1 OFF ON for APC control 0 1 1 OFF OFF 1 1 1 Video signal input enabled Video signal input enabled 0 1 1 OFF OFF 0 0 1 OFF ON for APC control 0 1 1 OFF OFF ...

Page 224: ...based on the BD synch signal Using the BD signal generated based on the light from laser A the DC controller PCB generates the BD synch signal for laser A and the BD synch signal for laser B The image data written to line memory is read out by the readout enable signal RE_A RE_B generated based on the BD synch signal BD_A BD_B for output to the laser driver PCB J318 DC CON CNT0 CNT1 CNT2 ...

Page 225: ...es light from laser A only and is free of light from laser B i e the BD signal is generated based on the light from laser A 6 3 2 Controlling the Intensity of Laser Light 6 3 2 1 APC Control 0006 5976 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The laser light hitting the photodiode included in the laserdiode is monitored and is controlled so that it remains a J318 J316 J301 MN CON 3 3 2 DC CON BD_A RE_A BD_B BD ...

Page 226: ...of the acceleration signal ACC signal and the deceleration signal DEC signal F 6 7 6 3 4 Controlling the Laser Shutter 6 3 4 1 Controlling the Laser Shutter 0006 5979 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 When the right door is opened the laser shutter link operating in conjunction with the cover causes the laser shutter to move down thus blocking the path of the laser light If the machine identifies the fr...

Page 227: ...Chapter 6 6 11 F 6 8 1 Laser shutter 2 Laser shutter link operates in conjunction with front cover 3 Laser unit 1 2 2 2 1 3 3 1 DOOR CLOSED DOOR OPEN ...

Page 228: ...g it in the direction of the arrow F 6 10 6 4 1 2 Removing the Left Cover 0007 8349 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the left cover 2 F 6 11 6 4 1 3 Removing the Laser Unit 0007 8350 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 F 6 12 When you have disconnected the connector 1 be sure to take care so that it will not come i...

Page 229: ...ve the screw 1 and detach the fixing 2 F 6 14 4 Lift the front of the laser unit 1 and slide it to the front F 6 15 When sliding out the laser scanner unit be sure to take care not to touch the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting ...

Page 230: ......

Page 231: ...Chapter 7 Image Formation ...

Page 232: ......

Page 233: ... Mechanism 7 12 7 5 1 1 Controlling the Primary Charging Bias 7 12 7 5 1 2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism 7 12 7 6 Drum Cleaner Unit 7 14 7 6 1 Photosensitive Drum Cleaning 7 14 7 7 Developing Unit 7 15 7 7 1 Controlling the Developing Bias 7 15 7 8 Toner Container 7 16 7 8 1 Overview 7 16 7 8 2 Route of Toner Supply 7 17 7 8 3 Controlling the Drive of the Toner Cartridge 7 18 7 8 4 To...

Page 234: ...rum Unit 7 41 7 12 3 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 7 43 7 12 3 6 Removing the Upper Tray 7 45 7 12 3 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 7 46 7 12 3 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 7 46 7 12 3 9 Removing the Left Cover 7 47 7 12 3 10 Removing the Laser Unit 7 48 7 12 3 11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 7 50 7 12 4 Sub Hopper 7 51 7 12 4 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 7 51 7 12 4 2 Removing t...

Page 235: ...88 7 12 9 9 Removing the Left Cover 7 89 7 12 9 10 Removing the Laser Unit 7 90 7 12 9 11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 7 92 7 12 9 12 Removing the Toner Level Sensor 7 93 7 12 10 Toner Feedscrew Motor 7 94 7 12 10 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 7 94 7 12 10 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 7 94 7 12 10 3 Removing the Toner Cartridge 7 95 7 12 10 4 Removing the Drum Unit 7 96 7 12 10 5 Removing the...

Page 236: ......

Page 237: ...rum type OPC Drum diameter 30 mm Cleaning mechanism by cleaning blade Process speed 230 mm sec iR3570 iR4570 137 mm sec iR2270 iR2870 Primary charging Charging method by roller AC DC Charging roller diameter 16 mm Cleaning mechanism by brush roller reciprocating mechanism Transfer charging Charging method by roller DC Charging roller diameter 16 mm LED 12 pc Timing of light emission in response to...

Page 238: ... single component toner projection method application of AC DC Toner single component insulating magnetic toner Toner level detection by toner level sensor inside sub hopper and developing assembly Toner level detection none Toner variable resistor 1220 g iR3570 iR4570 1060 g iR2270 iR2870 separation method by static eliminator curvature Waste toner collection to waste toner case ...

Page 239: ...Chapter 7 7 3 F 7 1 1 Toner cartridge 2 Sub hopper 3 Developing unit 4 Photosensitive drum 5 Transfer roller 6 Primary charging roller 7 Drum unit 8 Drum cleaning unit 1 2 3 7 8 4 5 6 ...

Page 240: ...re removes residual charges from the drum 2 Primary charging charges the surface of the photosensitive drum to a uniform negative potential 3 Laser exposure forms a latent static image on the drum 4 Development forms a visible image on the drum 5 Transfer transfers images from the drum to paper 6 Separation separates paper from the drum 7 Drum cleaning removes toner from the drum 6 B 4 2 7 5 3 C A...

Page 241: ...tween the drum surface and the developing sleeve causes toner to adhere to the latent static image on the drum turning the image into a visible image 2 The bias voltage applied to the transfer roller causes the toner to move from the drum to paper 3 The cleaning blade in contact with the drum scrapes off the residual toner from the drum ...

Page 242: ...g bias 2600 V is applied 7 3 2 Sequence of Operation initial rotation 0006 6867 iR3570 iR4570 Pickup motor Registration ON Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 Registration ON Multifeeder ON Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Develo...

Page 243: ...6868 iR2270 iR2870 The sequence of operation during copying is as follows Pickup motor Registration ON Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 Registration ON Multifeeder ON Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL T...

Page 244: ...quence 1st sheet Image formation sequence 2nd sheet and later Sheet to sheet sequence Registration ON Registration ON Image write end Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 Image sequence 1st sheet Image formation sequence 2nd sheet and later Sheet to sheet sequence Registration ON Registr...

Page 245: ...lows F 7 11 In 1 above a cleaning bias 2600 V is applied Image write end Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 Image write end Primary charging PRI Main motor M motor Laser LD Developing AC DEV_AC Developing DC DEV_DC Developing clutch DEV_CL Transfer TR Static removal SEP 1 ...

Page 246: ...3570 iR4570 The term APVC stands for auto primary voltage control and it is a mechanism used to control the primary charging application voltage DC component to suit the film thickness of the machine s photosensitive drum APVC is performed every 500 sheets while the machine is in operation It is forcibly performed when the drum unit is replaced 1 Drum film thickness detection control corrects the ...

Page 247: ...r 7 7 11 7 4 3 ATVC Control 0006 5989 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine is provided with a constant current control mechanism that can be enabled or disabled in service mode COPIER OPTION BODY TRANS SW ...

Page 248: ...age is being formed until the end of the ongoing job 7 5 1 2 Primary Charging Roller Cleaning Mechanism 0006 5992 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine uses a brush 3 to clean the primary charging roller 2 which remains in contact with the photosensitive drum 1 The brush has a reciprocating mechanism and is driven by a cam 4 operating while the photosensitive drum is being driven AC bias 2700 Vp...

Page 249: ...F 7 13 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 250: ...tive Drum Cleaning 0007 5224 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The cleaning blade is kept in contact with the surface of the photosensitive drum It serves to scrape off the residual toner left behind from transfer to paper for collection in the waste toner box ...

Page 251: ... 1 Controlling the Developing Bias 0006 6032 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 T 7 9 Developing Bias Both these AC and DC biases are applied while an image is being formed but are not applied between sheets AC bias 800 Vp p DC bias 450 V to 650 V ...

Page 252: ...artridge is filled with 1 component insulating magnetic toner if iR3570 4570 1220 g if iR2270 2870 1060 g When the sub hopper requests a supply of toner the cartridge itself rotates to feed toner The machine s toner cartridge serves as a hopper as it is found in past models iR3570 iR4570 F 7 14 iR2270 iR2870 F 7 15 Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge ...

Page 253: ...resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 16 7 8 2 Route of Toner Supply 0006 6363 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 When the user fits the toner cartridge 1 in place toner is temporarily stored in the sub hopper 2 inside which is a sensor that makes sure that the amount of toner remains at a specific level at all times When the developing assembly 4 requests a supply o...

Page 254: ...996 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 When a request is made for a supply of toner the toner cartridge drive motor rotates in the direction shown in the following figure its drive is transmitted from the drive motor to the toner cartridge thus rotating the toner cartridge F 7 18 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 255: ...etected inside the developing assembly E020 0000 If the absence of toner is detected by the developing assembly toner level sensor and the presence of toner is detected by the hopper toner level sensor the route of supply from the sub hopper to the developing assembly may be clogged or the output of these toner sensors may be faulty This error code will be indicated when the soft counter reaches 1...

Page 256: ... sampling of periods when the clutch is on as the unit of measurement if the presence of toner is detected 3 times or more it will assume that there is toner inside the developing assembly if the presence of toner is detected less than 3 times on the other hand it will assume that there is no toner inside the developing assembly However in the case of the iR3570 iR4570 Series machines the drive of...

Page 257: ...machine changes the output depending on the site environment absolute moisture content paper type paper width and source of paper Environment 5 settings according to absolute moisture content Paper type plain paper envelope heavy paper tracing paper transparency bond paper label sheet Paper width size boundaries as defined by 2 points Source of paper if from cassette including pedestal if from mul...

Page 258: ...rum by applying a cleaning bias to the roller Once the toner reaches the drum it is scraped by the photosensitive drum cleaning blade for collection in the waste toner box 7 9 4 Separation Mechanism 7 9 4 1 Controlling the Static Eliminator Bias 0006 6001 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Static Eliminator Bias 1st side 2300 V 2nd side 3000 V A DC bias is applied between sheets while an image is being f...

Page 259: ...5 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 To prevent soiling of the transfer guide with toner or the photosensitive drum with toner images the following transfer guide bias is applied to the transfer guide The surface of the transfer guide is covered with an insulating sheet Transfer guide bias 1st side 570 V 2nd side 740 V ...

Page 260: ...at the front of the machine The waste toner feedscrew is operated by the drive from the drum flange 7 11 3 Checking the Waste Toner Box 0006 6036 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 To prevent leakage of waste toner from the waste toner box or to prevent overloading the waste toner feedscrew the machine is equipped with a waste toner detection mechanism The waste toner box can hold about 2043 cc of toner ...

Page 261: ...ntifies the waste toner full sensor as being continuously on for 2000 sheets it will indicate a warning if it then detects the activation of the sensor for 100 sheets continuously it will indicate E190 000 The count is increased coinciding with delivery ...

Page 262: ...n of the arrow F 7 22 7 12 1 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8031 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 23 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in s...

Page 263: ...r scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing Since the toner stop 1 comes off easily as mentioned above toner scattering may be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 27 7 12 1 4 Removing the Drum Unit 0007 8343 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 28 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7 29...

Page 264: ...move the drum unit 1 F 7 32 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown F 7 33 7 12 1 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007 8344 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 F 7 34 2 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly ...

Page 265: ...e developing assembly 1 F 7 37 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown F 7 38 When fitting the developing assembly be sure to fit the lower right segment 2 of the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 7 39 ...

Page 266: ...lide it toward the front F 7 41 7 12 1 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8346 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the toner bottle cover 2 F 7 42 7 12 1 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 0007 8347 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 relay connectors 2 F 7 43 2 While freeing the lock 1 toward the right detach the pre exposu...

Page 267: ... unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 47 7 12 2 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8030 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 48 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection may be ...

Page 268: ...R2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 50 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7 51 3 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 52 4 Remove the screw 1 F 7 53 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 7 54 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown ...

Page 269: ...ver unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 57 7 12 3 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8017 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 58 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection may ...

Page 270: ...he like when and after removing the toner cartridge Since the toner stop comes off easily toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing Since the toner stop 1 comes off easily as mentioned above toner scattering may be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 62 7 12 3 4 Removing the Drum Unit 00...

Page 271: ...he left to release the developing assembly F 7 65 4 Remove the screw 1 F 7 66 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 7 67 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown F 7 68 7 12 3 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007 8353 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 ...

Page 272: ...disconnect the connector 2 F 7 71 4 Remove the developing assembly 1 F 7 72 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown F 7 73 When fitting the developing assembly be sure to fit the lower right segment 2 of the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail ...

Page 273: ...ont of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front F 7 76 7 12 3 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8355 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the toner bottle cover 2 F 7 77 7 12 3 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 0007 8357 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 relay connectors 2 ...

Page 274: ...g the Laser Unit 0007 8359 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 F 7 82 When you have disconnected the connector 1 be sure to take care so that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment variable resistor Contact with the PCB can change the adjustment ...

Page 275: ...it The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting 7 12 3 11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 0007 8360 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the inside base cover 1 and the inside right color 2 F 7 86 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 found at the front and the connector 2 found at the rear F 7 87 3 Open the 11 wi...

Page 276: ...pplied with power leading to image faults F 7 90 7 12 4 Sub Hopper 7 12 4 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 8020 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the front cover 1 F 7 91 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4 Remove the RS tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 92 7 12 4 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8...

Page 277: ...iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Shift up the lever 1 F 7 95 2 Remove the toner cartridge 1 F 7 96 Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge 1 Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop 1 against the covers or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge Since the toner stop comes off easily toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartridge horiz...

Page 278: ...270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 98 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7 99 3 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 100 4 Remove the screw 1 F 7 101 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 7 102 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown 1 ...

Page 279: ...R2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 F 7 104 2 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 105 3 Slide the developing assembly 1 slightly to the front then disconnect the connector 2 F 7 106 4 Remove the developing assembly 1 F 7 107 ...

Page 280: ...bly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 7 109 7 12 4 6 Removing the Upper Tray 0007 8389 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the upper tray 2 F 7 110 Reference Lift the front of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front F 7 111 7 12 4 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8390 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2...

Page 281: ...F 7 113 2 While freeing the lock 1 toward the right detach the pre exposure lamp 2 F 7 114 F 7 115 7 12 4 9 Removing the Left Cover 0007 8392 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the left cover 2 F 7 116 7 12 4 10 Removing the Laser Unit 0007 8393 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 282: ...ect the connector 2 F 7 118 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing 2 F 7 119 4 Lift the front of the laser unit 1 and slide it to the front F 7 120 When sliding out the laser scanner unit be sure to take care not to touch the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment s...

Page 283: ...F 7 123 4 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the hopper assembly 2 F 7 124 When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine be sure that the connectors 1 are securely connected If the connectors 1 are not connected the environment heater will not be supplied with power leading to image faults F 7 125 7 12 4 12 Removing the Toner Feedscrew Motor 0007 8395 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the c...

Page 284: ... Remove the screw 1 and detach the toner feedscrew motor 3 from the base F 7 128 7 12 4 13 Removing the Sub Hopper 0007 8396 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 2 from the back of the sub hopper 1 F 7 129 2 Check the phase of the gear 1 shown in the figure F 7 130 3 Remove the 3 screws 1 ...

Page 285: ...elease the arm 2 F 7 133 6 Remove the bushing unit 2 from the sub hopper 1 F 7 134 7 Disconnect the connector 1 F 7 135 8 Detach the sub hopper 1 from the bottom F 7 136 7 12 5 Developing Assembly 7 12 5 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 8022 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the front cover 1 ...

Page 286: ...r case 1 F 7 139 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in something and is not moved smoothly F 7 140 7 12 5 3 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007 8034 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR457...

Page 287: ...e developing assembly 1 F 7 144 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown F 7 145 When fitting the developing assembly be sure to fit the lower right segment 2 of the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 7 146 ...

Page 288: ...7 147 2 While freeing the claw 1 detach the sleeve front guide 2 in the direction of the arrow F 7 148 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the angle adjusting plate 2 F 7 149 4 Remove the E ring 1 then remove the washer 2 bearing 3 gear 4 and parallel pin 5 F 7 150 5 Remove the screw 1 and detach the gear unit 2 F 7 151 6 Remove the sleeve bushing 1 gear 2 and parallel pin 3 ...

Page 289: ...hing Be sure that the longer protrusion 5 is on the developing cylinder side Otherwise you will not be able to fit the gear unit 7 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the washer 2 then detach the transfer upper guide 3 F 7 153 8 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the blade unit 2 F 7 154 9 Remove the 2 screws 1 then remove the 2 bearings 2 and the sleeve holder rear 3 F 7 155 10 Remove the grip ring 1 ...

Page 290: ...he developing cylinder be sure to fit it first to the developing unit 4 Do not touch the developing cylinder or subject it to impact 7 12 7 Transfer Charging Roller 7 12 7 1 Removing the Transfer Roller 0007 8431 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 158 2 Pull off the pin 1 toward the front F 7 159 3 Remove the holder 1 from the front of the transfer roller F 7 160 4 Remove the ...

Page 291: ...tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 165 7 12 8 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8015 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 166 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lev...

Page 292: ...cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 7 169 7 12 9 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8025 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the waste toner case 1 F 7 170 Point to note after attaching the waste toner receptacle After attaching the waste toner receptacle move the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection ...

Page 293: ...he like when and after removing the toner cartridge Since the toner stop comes off easily toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartridge horizontal after removing Since the toner stop 1 comes off easily as mentioned above toner scattering may be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 174 7 12 9 4 Removing the Drum Unit 0...

Page 294: ... left to release the developing assembly F 7 177 4 Remove the screw 1 F 7 178 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 7 179 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown F 7 180 7 12 9 5 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007 8366 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 ...

Page 295: ...isconnect the connector 2 F 7 183 4 Remove the developing assembly 1 F 7 184 Be sure to hold the developing assembly as shown F 7 185 When fitting the developing assembly be sure to fit the lower right segment 2 of the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail ...

Page 296: ...ont of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front F 7 188 7 12 9 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8368 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the toner bottle cover 2 F 7 189 7 12 9 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 0007 8369 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 relay connectors 2 ...

Page 297: ...ing the Laser Unit 0007 8371 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 F 7 194 When you have disconnected the connector 1 be sure to take care so that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment variable resistor Contact with the PCB can change the adjustme...

Page 298: ...it The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting 7 12 9 11 Removing the Hopper Assembly 0007 8372 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the inside base cover 1 and the inside right color 2 F 7 198 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 found at the front and the connector 2 found at the rear F 7 199 3 Open the 11 ...

Page 299: ...faults F 7 202 7 12 9 12 Removing the Toner Level Sensor 0007 8373 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and disconnect the connector 2 then detach the toner sensor 3 F 7 203 7 12 10 Toner Feedscrew Motor 7 12 10 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 8019 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the front cover 1 F 7 204 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4 Remove...

Page 300: ...e the waste toner full detection lever 1 up and down to make sure that the lever is moved smoothly Faulty detection may be resulted if the lever is caught in something and is not moved smoothly F 7 207 7 12 10 3 Removing the Toner Cartridge 0007 8375 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Shift up the lever 1 F 7 208 2 Remove the toner cartridge 1 F 7 209 Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge 1 Car...

Page 301: ...ving Since the toner stop 1 comes off easily as mentioned above toner scattering may be resulted if the toner cartridge is placed with the toner stop side down F 7 210 7 12 10 4 Removing the Drum Unit 0007 8376 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 211 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7 212 3 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 213 4 Remove the scre...

Page 302: ...5 Removing the Developing Assembly 0007 8377 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 F 7 217 2 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 7 218 3 Slide the developing assembly 1 slightly to the front then disconnect the connector 2 F 7 219 ...

Page 303: ...2 of the developing assembly 1 in the rail 3 of the machine Thereafter slide the developing assembly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 7 222 7 12 10 6 Removing the Upper Tray 0007 8378 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the upper tray 2 F 7 223 Reference Lift the front of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front ...

Page 304: ...225 7 12 10 8 Removing the Pre Exposure Lamp 0007 8381 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 relay connectors 2 F 7 226 2 While freeing the lock 1 toward the right detach the pre exposure lamp 2 F 7 227 F 7 228 7 12 10 9 Removing the Left Cover 0007 8382 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the left cover 2 ...

Page 305: ...ke care so that it will not come into contact with the PCB that is mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser intensity adjustment variable resistor Contact with the PCB can change the adjustment setting 2 Open the wire saddle 1 and disconnect the connector 2 F 7 231 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing 2 F 7 232 4 Lift the front of the laser unit 1 and slide it to th...

Page 306: ...Remove the inside base cover 1 and the inside right color 2 F 7 234 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 found at the front and the connector 2 found at the rear F 7 235 3 Open the 11 wire saddles 1 and pull out the harness 3 through the hole 2 in the plate F 7 236 4 Remove the 3 screws 1 and detach the hopper assembly 2 F 7 237 When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine be sure that the connector...

Page 307: ... detach the toner feedscrew motor assembly 2 F 7 240 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the toner feedscrew motor 3 from the base F 7 241 7 12 11 Static Charge Eliminator 7 12 11 1 Removing the Static Eliminator 0007 8428 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door 1 F 7 242 2 Remove the screw 1 F 7 243 3 Detach the static eliminator 1 to the front F 7 244 ...

Page 308: ......

Page 309: ...Chapter 8 Pickup Feeding System ...

Page 310: ......

Page 311: ... 8 2 2 Increase in Speed 8 17 8 2 3 Increase in Speed 8 20 8 3 Detecting Jams 8 23 8 3 1 Delivery Jams 8 23 8 3 1 1 Delay Jam Outside the Cassette Pickup Assembly 8 23 8 3 1 2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly 8 23 8 3 2 Stationary Jams 8 24 8 3 2 1 Common Stationary Jam 8 24 8 3 2 2 Stationary Jam at Power On 8 25 8 3 3 Other Jams 8 25 8 3 3 1 Door Open Jam 8 25 8 4 Cassette Pick Up Unit ...

Page 312: ...4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 8 75 8 8 4 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 8 76 8 8 4 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 8 77 8 8 4 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 8 77 8 8 4 8 Mounting the Sensor Mounting Plate 8 79 8 8 5 Cassette Pick up Motor 1 8 80 8 8 5 1 Removing the Rear Cover 8 80 8 8 5 2 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 81 8 8 5 3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base 8 81 8 8 5 4 Remo...

Page 313: ... 10 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 8 115 8 8 10 8 Removing the Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 8 116 8 8 11 Slide Resistor 8 116 8 8 11 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 116 8 8 11 2 Removing the Right Door 8 117 8 8 11 3 Removing the Right Door 8 119 8 8 11 4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 8 120 8 8 11 5 Removing the Manual Tray Unit 8 122 8 8 11 6 Removing the Slide Resistor 8 123 8 8 12 Ca...

Page 314: ...n Pad 8 162 8 8 18 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 162 8 8 18 2 Removing the Right Door 8 162 8 8 18 3 Removing the Right Door 8 164 8 8 18 4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 8 165 8 8 18 5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller 8 167 8 8 18 6 Removing the Manual Feed Separation pad 8 168 8 8 19 Registration Clutch 8 168 8 8 19 1 Removing the Rear Cover 8 168 8 8 19 2 Removing the Main Drive Assemb...

Page 315: ...emoving the Delivery Tray 8 193 8 8 25 4 Removing the Right Door 8 194 8 8 25 5 Removing the Right Door 8 196 8 8 25 6 Removing the Extension Delivery Kit 8 197 8 8 25 7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 8 198 8 8 26 Fixing Delivery Drive Assembly 8 199 8 8 26 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 8 199 8 8 26 2 Removing the Front Cover Unit 8 199 8 8 26 3 Removing the Delivery Tray 8 200 8 8 26 4 Removi...

Page 316: ......

Page 317: ...per size cassette 1 B4 A4 B5 LGL LTR EXE A4R B5R LTRR A5R STMTR cassette 2 A3 B4 A4 B5 LGL LTR EXE LDR A4R B5R LTRR A5R STMTR manual feed tray A3 B4 A4 B5 LDR LGL LTR A4R B5R LTRR A5R STMTR EXE postcard envelope free size Paper weight cassette 1 2 64 to 80 g m2 single sided 64 to 80 g m2 auto double sided manual feed tray 64 to 128 g m2 if double sided manual feeding only no auto duplexing Paper s...

Page 318: ...ing Delivery accessory 3 Way Unit A1 standard with iR4570 3570 model Inner 2 Way Tray D1 Copy Tray J1 Finisher S1 Buffer Path Unit E1 Finisher Q3 Saddle Finisher Q4 Inner Puncher Kit Q1 R1 S1 T1 Punch Unit L1 M1 N1 P1 Pickup accessory 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 Side Paper Deck Q1 Envelope Cassette Attachment C1 Item Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 319: ...r assembly 6 Duplexing feeding assembly 7 Fixing assembly 8 No 1 delivery assembly 8 1 3 Division into Blocks 0007 1444 iR3570 iR4570 F 8 2 1 Pickup assembly cassette 2 2 Pickup assembly cassette 1 3 Manual feed pickup assembly 4 Registration roller assembly 5 Transfer assembly 6 Duplexing feeding assembly 7 Fixing assembly 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 320: ...ler cassette 1 3 Separation roller cassette 1 4 Pickup roller cassette 2 5 Feeding roller cassette 2 6 Separation roller cassette 2 7 Vertical path roller 2 8 Vertical path slave roller 2 9 Vertical path roller 1 10 Vertical path slave roller 1 11 Manual feed pickup roller 12 Registration roller inside 3 2 1 4 6 5 7 9 8 12 11 10 14 16 15 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 13 ...

Page 321: ...18 Duplexing feed roller 1 19 Duplexing feeding member 1 20 Pressure roller 21 Fixing outlet roller 22 Fixing outlet member 23 Fixing film 24 Delivery roller 25 Delivery member 8 1 5 Arrangement of Rollers 0007 1461 iR3570 iR4570 F 8 4 14 16 15 17 18 19 20 22 21 23 13 12 9 11 10 3 2 1 4 6 5 7 8 34 35 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 ...

Page 322: ...er 2 16 Transfer roller 17 Drum 18 Duplexing feed roller 1 19 Duplexing feeding member 1 20 Presser roller 21 Fixing film 22 Fixing outlet roller 23 Fixing outlet roll 24 Delivery roll No 3 delivery assembly 25 Delivery roller No 3 delivery assembly 26 Duplexing inlet roller 27 Duplexing inlet member 28 Vertical path slave roller 3 29 Vertical path roller 3 30 Delivery roller No 2 delivery assembl...

Page 323: ...om cassette 1 2 Pickup from cassette 2 3 Pickup from cassette pedestal 4 Pickup from side paper deck 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery from copy tray 1 8 1 7 Diagram of Paper Paths w copy tray 0007 1484 iR3570 iR4570 2 1 5 4 6 3 ...

Page 324: ...from cassette pedestal option 4 Pickup from side paper deck option 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery to copy tray 1 7 Delivery to copy tray 2 option 8 Delivery to copy tray 3 option 8 1 8 Diagram of Paper Paths w 3 Way Unit A1 copy tray 0006 7404 iR2270 iR2870 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 325: ...assette pedestal option 4 Pickup from side paper deck option 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery to copy tray 1 7 Delivery to copy tray 2 option 8 Delivery to copy tray 3 option 8 1 9 Diagram of Paper Paths w Finisher S1 copy tray 0006 7405 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 326: ...ickup from cassette pedestal option 4 Pickup from paper deck option 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery to Finisher S1 option 7 Delivery to copy tray 3 option 8 1 10 Diagram of Paper Paths w Finisher Q3 Saddle Finisher Q4 0006 7406 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 327: ...cassette 2 3 Pickup from cassette pedestal option 4 Pickup from paper deck option 5 Pickup from manual feeder 6 Delivery to Finisher Q3 Saddle Finisher Q4 option 7 No 2 delivery assembly option 8 1 11 Arrangement of Sensors 0006 7408 iR2270 iR2870 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 328: ...2 paper sensor PS2 6 Cassette 2 retry sensor PS11 7 Cassette 1 paper sensor PS1 8 Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 9 Manual feeder paper sensor PS7 10 Registration sensor PS9 11 Duplexing feed sensor PS17 12 Fixing delivery paper sensor PS13 14 Delivery sensor 1 PS14 15 Delivery paper full sensor 1 PS15 8 1 12 Arrangement of Sensors 0007 1487 iR3570 iR4570 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 13 12 14 6 ...

Page 329: ...te 2 retry sensor PS11 7 Cassette 1 paper sensor PS1 8 Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 9 Manual feed paper sensor PS7 10 Registration sensor PS9 11 Duplexing feed sensor PS17 12 Fixing delivery sensor PS13 13 Duplexing inlet sensor PS3A 14 Delivery sensor 3 PS5A 15 Delivery sensor 1 PS14 16 Delivery sensor 2 PS1A 17 Reversal sensor PS4A 18 Delivery full sensor 2 PS2A 1 2 3 4 5 7 8 9 10 11 15 12 19 6 ...

Page 330: ...otor M3 Fixing motor M4 No 1 delivery motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup motor M7 Cassette 2 pickup motor SL1 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid CL1 Manual pickup clutch CL2 Registration clutch CL6 Duplexing clutch 8 1 14 Route of Drive 0007 9020 iR3570 iR4570 CL1 M2 M7 CL2 SL2 SL1 CL6 M4 M3 M6 ...

Page 331: ...4 No 1 delivery motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup motor M7 Cassette 2 pickup motor M10 Duplexing motor SL1 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL2 Cassette 2 pickup solenoid CL1 Manual pickup clutch CL2 Registration clutch Expancion Delivery Unit CL1 M10 M2 M7 CL2 SL2 SL1 M4 M3 M6 ...

Page 332: ...Chapter 8 8 16 F 8 14 M1 No 2 delivery motor M2 No 3 delivery motor SL1 No 1 delivery solenoid SL2 No 2 delivery solenoid SL3 No 3 delivery solenoid SL1 SL2 M1 M2 SL3 ...

Page 333: ...w and the associated accessories for the increase in speed are as follows No Delivery Accessory Print Start Cassette 1 pickup motor M6 Cassette 1 pickup solenoid SL1 Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 Main motor M2 Registration sensor PS9 Registration clutch CL2 Fixing motor M11 Fixing delivery paper sensor PS13 No 1 delivery motor M4 Delivery sensor 1 PS14 1 3 2 PRINT 1 pickup 3 registration 2 pre regi...

Page 334: ...crease in Speed for Pickup Operation The speed is 1 5 times as high as the process speed no increase if for manual feed pickup in the case of the 1st sheet from cassette 1 accelerates to about twice as fast Finisher S1 in Use 1 ...

Page 335: ...igh as the process speed no increase if for manual feed pickup in the case of the 1st sheet from cassette 1 accelerates to about twice as fast 2 Increase in Speed for Reversal The speed is 3 4 times as high as the process speed no increase if for delivery to tray 3 Finisher Q3 Q4 in Use 1 2 ...

Page 336: ...peed is 2 5 times as high as the process speed 3 Increase in Speed for the Buffer Path The speed is 2 5 times as high as the process speed no increase if for delivery to saddle 4 Increase in Speed for Reversal The speed is 3 4 times as high as the process speed 8 2 3 Increase in Speed 0007 8663 iR3570 iR4570 The machine increases the speed of moving paper over specific intervals An overview and th...

Page 337: ... for Pickup The speed is 1 5 times as high as the process speed in the case of manual feed decelerates to about 0 6 2 Increase in Speed for Reversal The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed no increase if for delivery to tray 3 Finisher Q3 Q4 in Use 1 2 ...

Page 338: ... Increase in Speed for Pickup The speed is 1 5 times as high as the process speed in the cassette of manual feed decelerates to about 0 6 2 Increase in Speed for Reversal The speed is 2 times as high as the process speed 1 2 ...

Page 339: ...identified if the delay jam sensor does not go on within a specific length of time after the sensor N has gone on F 8 21 T 8 2 8 3 1 2 Delay Jam in the Cassette Pickup Assembly 0007 2664 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The leading edge of paper does not reach the sensor after the cassette 1 2 pickup motor has started to rotate Sensor Registration sensor PS9 Fixing delivery sensor PS13 No 1 delivery se...

Page 340: ...te 1 cassette 1 pickup motor cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 Cassette 2 cassette 2 pickup motor cassette 2 retry sensor PS11 Sensor Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 Cassette 2 retry sensor PS11 Registration sensor PS9 Jam check Sensor N Pickup motor Normal 1 specific length of feed in time Error Start key ON or PRINT set 1 1 INTR PRINT Jam Check Sensor N Normal L paper length feed distance A specific fee...

Page 341: ...m 0007 2668 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 A door open jam is identified when the machine detects the opening of the door while it is making copies prints T 8 6 Fixing outlet sensor PS13 No 1 delivery sensor PS14 Duplex feed sensor PS17 Sensor Cassette 1 retry sensor PS10 Cassette 2 retry sensor PS11 Registration sensor PS9 Fixing outlet sensor PS13 No 1 delivery sensor PS14 Duplex feed sensor PS17 S...

Page 342: ...ller serve to make sure that a single sheet of paper is moved to the feed path and the paper is moved as far as the registration roller by the work of the vertical path roller The pickup vertical path roller pickup roller feed roller and separation roller are driven by the cassette pickup motor F 8 24 1 Cassette paper sensor 2 Pickup roller roller A 3 Feed roller roller B 4 Separation roller rolle...

Page 343: ... with the cassette size dial In the absence of a cassette all 4 actuators are off causing the machine to assume there is no cassette AB Inch Switch The cassette size dial is equipped with a switch operated to change between AB and Inch configurations the cassette size detecting switch will detect the configuration as soon as a cassette is fitted in the machine Print Start Cassette 1 pickup motor M...

Page 344: ...ize SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 no cassette OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF A5R ON OFF ON ON OFF A4 ON ON ON ON OFF A4R OFF ON ON ON OFF A3 OFF ON OFF ON OFF B5 ON ON OFF ON OFF B5R OFF OFF OFF ON OFF B4 ON OFF OFF ON OFF U1 OFF ON OFF OFF OFF U2 OFF ON ON OFF OFF Envelope ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF 2 SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 INCH SW4 ON INCH 1 ...

Page 345: ... is detected an envelope cassette must be fitted Inch configuration Size SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 no cassette OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF STMTR ON OFF ON ON ON LTR ON ON ON ON ON LTRR OFF ON ON ON ON LGL OFF ON OFF ON ON 11X17 ON ON OFF ON ON EXEC OFF OFF OFF ON ON U3 OFF ON OFF OFF ON U4 OFF ON ON OFF ON Envelope ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF SW4 is used to detect the state of the AB Inch configuration switch The mach...

Page 346: ...Paper Level Sensor 0007 8702 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The level of paper inside the cassette is checked using the following sensors T 8 11 U1 G LTR U2 FLSC U3 G LGL U4 A LTR Universal U1 Through U4 Size FLSC OFI E OFI B OFI A OFI M OFI FOLI A FLS G LTR G LGL A LTR LTR A LTRR LTRR Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Paper level sensor A PS3 PS5 ...

Page 347: ...ssette paper sensor 3 Lifter clutch 4 Cassette paper level sensor A 5 Cassette paper level sensor B 6 Paper level sensor flag 7 Lifter gear 8 Tray Paper level sensor B PS4 PS6 Paper sensor PS1 PS2 Cassette 1 Cassette 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 348: ...l with paper Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A When there is little paper OFF ON When half full with paper Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A Paper Cassette paper level sensor B Cassette paper level sensor A When there is no paper Paper tray Cassette paper sensor Flag ON ON View from the Front of the Machine ...

Page 349: ...ON OFF OFF 50 to 50 sheets approx ON ON OFF 50 sheets or less approx ON No paper Paper level sensor A Paper level sensor B Paper sensor Paper level Control panel indication ...

Page 350: ...o the machine 1 the pickup guide plate is locked in place at all times and does not require drive for pickup operation 2 multi pickup roller is driven by the main motor M2 through the manual feed pickup clutch CL1 F 8 29 1 Upper guide 2 Stopper plate 3 Side guide 4 Manual feed pickup tray 5 Pressure spring 6 Holding plate 7 Manual feed paper sensor flag 8 Separation pad 9 Manual feed pickup roller...

Page 351: ...e again goes on to pick up paper The manual feed pickup clutch CL1 goes off immediately before the trailing edge of paper moves past the manual feed pickup roller thereafter the registration roller serves to pull off the paper F 8 30 8 5 3 Identifying the Paper Size 0007 2187 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The width of paper is detected with reference to the output of the variable resistor SVR1 which...

Page 352: ...ed when paper is set between it and the manual feed pickup roller It is linked to the upper guide so that it opens when the user opens the guide to prevent the user from placing paper without opening the upper guide the guide is equipped with a stopper plate 1 When the upper guide is closed the holding plate is locked in place and the stopper plate prevents the user from placing paper F 8 32 2 Whe...

Page 353: ...Chapter 8 8 37 F 8 33 3 When the upper guide is closed once again the holding plate becomes locked in position once again F 8 34 ...

Page 354: ...0 The machine does not have a mechanism to check horizontal registration for both 1st and 2nd sides of a print The point of horizontal registration for the 2nd side may be adjusted in service mode i e the image write start position The degree of arching for registration on the 2nd side of a double sided print must be adjusted separately from the adjustment for the 1st side to accommodate the fact ...

Page 355: ...e of double sided prints Reference small size A4 B5 and the like whose side in paper feed direction is shorter than that of LTR Large size A3 A4R B5R and the like whose side in feed direction is longer than that of LTR The term 2nd side of a double sided print as used in relation to the machine s service mode refers to the side that receives an image second in order in other words it corresponds t...

Page 356: ...ing depending on whether or not the machine is equipped with a delivery accessory If a delivery accessory is present the reversing rollers are used to turn over the sheet If no delivery accessory is present the delivery rollers are used to turn over the sheet 3 Way Unit A1 Configuration of Components If Without a Delivery Accessory F 8 36 1 Delivery roller 2 Delivery sensor 1 PS14 3 Reversing flap...

Page 357: ...ng roller 2 Reversal sensor PS4A 3 Duplexing inlet sensor PS3A 4 Duplexing inlet roller 5 Duplexing feeding roller 1 6 Duplexing feed sensor PS17 7 Duplexing feeding roller 2 8 7 2 Overview 0007 2221 iR3570 iR4570 Inside the duplexing assembly are 2 sets of rollers that are driven by the duplexing motor M10 6 3 2 1 4 5 7 ...

Page 358: ...Duplexing inlet roller 5 Duplexing feeding roller 1 6 Duplexing feed sensor PS17 7 Duplexing feeding roller 2 8 7 3 Sequence of Image Formation 0007 2223 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine goes thorough the following sequence to form images when making double sided copies prints 6 3 2 1 4 5 7 ...

Page 359: ...eets A4 LTR 5 sheets A4 LTR 6 sheets A3 LDR 3 sheets 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 4 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 3 1 4 1 5 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 2 3 1 4 1 6 2 5 1 6 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 3 2 3 1 A4 LTR 4 sheets A4 LTR 5 sheets A4 LTR 6 sheets A3 LDR 3 sheets 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 4 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 3 1 4 1 5 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 2 3 1 4 1 6 2 5 1 6 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2...

Page 360: ... 5 sheets indicates the 1st side of the 1st sheet indicates the 2nd side of the 1st sheet 3 2 1 1 2 2 2 1 3 1 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 A4 LTR 4 sheets A4 LTR 5 sheets A4 LTR 6 sheets A3 LDR 3 sheets 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 2 1 4 2 3 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 1 4 2 5 2 5 2 3 1 4 1 5 1 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 1 3 2 4 2 3 1 4 1 6 2 5 1 6 1 1 2 1 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 1 3 2 2 1 3 1 5 sheets indicates the 1st side of the 1st she...

Page 361: ...07 3125 iR2270 iR2870 A4 LTR 5 Sheets A number in a circle indicates the 1st side while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side F 8 44 The 1st sheet is picked up F 8 45 An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is picked up 1 1 2 ...

Page 362: ...r and moved to duplexing registration An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet F 8 47 The 1st sheet is moved for registration once again The 2nd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration The 3rd sheet is picked up 1 2 3 2 1 ...

Page 363: ...eet and for the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 49 The 1st sheet is delivered The 3rd sheet is turned over and moved for duplexing registration The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again The 4th sheet is picked up 1 2 3 1 4 3 2 1 ...

Page 364: ...t and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 51 The 2nd sheet is delivered The 4th sheet is reversed and is moved for duplexing registration The 3rd sheet is picked for registration once again The 5th sheet is picked up 3 4 2 2 1 5 4 3 2 1 ...

Page 365: ...de of the 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet The 4th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 53 The 3rd sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is turned over and moved for registration The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again 2 1 4 3 3 5 3 5 4 2 1 ...

Page 366: ... 54 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 55 The 4th sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again F 8 56 3 2 1 4 4 5 5 3 4 2 1 3 4 2 1 5 5 ...

Page 367: ... 8 57 The 5th sheet is delivered 8 7 6 Flow of Paper w delivery option 0007 3126 iR2270 iR2870 A4 LTR 5 Sheets Delivery to Tray 1 2 A number in a circle indicates the 1st side while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side F 8 58 The 1st sheet is picked up 3 2 1 4 5 1 ...

Page 368: ...image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is picked up F 8 60 The 1st sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet F 8 61 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 369: ...eet is picked up F 8 62 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 63 The 1st sheet is delivered The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again The 4th sheet is picked up 1 3 1 2 4 2 1 3 ...

Page 370: ... and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 65 The 2nd sheet is delivered The 4th sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 3rd sheet is moved for registration once again The 5th sheet is picked up 2 3 2 4 1 5 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 371: ...he 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 67 The 3rd sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again 3 5 4 3 1 2 3 1 2 4 5 ...

Page 372: ... 68 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 69 The 4th sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again F 8 70 4 4 1 2 3 5 4 1 2 3 5 5 4 1 2 3 5 ...

Page 373: ...h sheet F 8 71 The 5th sheet is delivered 8 7 7 Flow of Paper 0007 3407 iR3570 iR4570 A4 LTR 5 Sheets Delivery to Tray 1 2 A number in a circle indicates the 1st side while a number in a square indicates the 2nd side F 8 72 The 1st sheet is picked up 4 1 2 3 5 1 ...

Page 374: ...image is formed for the 2nd side of the 1st sheet The 2nd sheet is picked up F 8 74 The 1st sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration An image is formed for the 2nd side of the 2nd sheet F 8 75 1 2 2 1 1 2 3 ...

Page 375: ...eet is picked up F 8 76 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 1st sheet and the 2nd side of the 3rd sheet The 2nd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 77 The 1st sheet is delivered The 3rd sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 2nd sheet is moved for registration once again The 4th sheet is picked up 1 3 1 2 4 2 1 3 ...

Page 376: ... and for the 2nd side of the 4th sheet The 3rd sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 79 The 2nd sheet is delivered The 4th sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 3rd sheet is moved for registration once again The 5th sheet is picked up 2 3 2 4 1 5 1 2 3 4 ...

Page 377: ...he 3rd sheet and for the 2nd side of the 5th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 81 The 3rd sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is turned over and is moved for duplexing registration The 4th sheet is moved for registration once again 3 5 4 3 1 2 3 1 2 4 5 ...

Page 378: ... 82 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 4th sheet The 5th sheet is moved for duplexing F 8 83 The 4th sheet is delivered The 5th sheet is moved for registration once again F 8 84 4 4 1 2 3 5 4 1 2 3 5 5 4 1 2 3 5 ...

Page 379: ...Chapter 8 8 63 An image is formed for the 1st side of the 5th sheet F 8 85 The 5th sheet is delivered 4 1 2 3 5 ...

Page 380: ...right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 86 8 8 1 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6552 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 8 87 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 88 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 89 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screw...

Page 381: ...the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 92 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 1 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7329 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 8 93 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door ...

Page 382: ...Removing the Right Cover lower front 0007 6553 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 96 8 8 1 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6554 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 then fre...

Page 383: ...ving the Right Cover lower front 0007 6556 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 100 8 8 2 3 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007 6557 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the h...

Page 384: ... and separation roller 3 F 8 102 Point to Note When Replacing the Feed Separation Roller 1 The collar roller core of the machine s feed separation roller is black 8 8 4 Sensor Mount 8 8 4 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6558 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach th...

Page 385: ... 106 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 107 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 108 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate ...

Page 386: ...or 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 111 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 112 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 4 4 Removing the ...

Page 387: ... from the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 114 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and take out the pickup unit 1 2 F 8 115 8 8 4 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007 6565 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness from the guide then remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 116 8 8 4 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Pla...

Page 388: ... iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Take care not to orient the pickup unit facing down when mounting the sensor base otherwise the gears will fall out 1 After fitting the bushing 1 to the frame mount the gear shaft 2 F 8 120 2 Fit the 6 points A indicated in the figure in the holes of the base then mount the sensor base 2 using 4 screws 1 F 8 121 3 Mount the gear 1 and the E ring 2 Be sure not to leave ...

Page 389: ... then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 8 123 8 8 5 2 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6988 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 124 ...

Page 390: ... 2 connectors 1 F 8 127 4 Remove the 5 screws 1 and detach the pickup motor base 2 F 8 128 8 8 5 4 Removing the Cassette Pickup Motor 1 0007 6578 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws and detach the cassette pickup motor 1 2 F 8 129 8 8 6 Cassette Pick up Motor 2 8 8 6 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6598 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 th...

Page 391: ... the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 131 8 8 6 3 Removing the Pickup Motor Base 0007 6990 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Free the harness 1 from the 2 wire saddles 2 F 8 132 2 Remove the 5 screws 1 Remove the power cord base 2 F 8 133 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 392: ...70 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the cassette pickup motor 2 2 F 8 136 8 8 7 Cassette Size Sensor 8 8 7 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6602 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 137 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 393: ...delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 140 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 141 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 142 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on th...

Page 394: ...or 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 145 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 146 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 7 4 Removing the ...

Page 395: ...or 1 and free the harness from the guide then remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 148 8 8 7 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6609 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 then free the harness from the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 149 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and take out the pickup unit 1 2 F 8 150 8 8 7 7 Rem...

Page 396: ...lamps 3 in the case of the size sensor 2 the 4 clamps 3 and 4 F 8 152 4 Remove the screw 1 and detach the cassette size sensor together with the PCB 2 in the case of the size sensor 1 together with the size sensor 2 in the case of the size sensor 2 remove the sensor on its own F 8 153 5 Detach the cover 1 from the PCB F 8 154 6 Detach the size sensor 1 from the PCB F 8 155 8 8 8 Cassette Retry Pap...

Page 397: ...g the Right Door 0007 6612 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 8 157 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 158 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 159 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 160 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 ...

Page 398: ...the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 8 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7337 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 8 163 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 164 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found...

Page 399: ...door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 166 8 8 8 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6614 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect that 3 connectors 1 then free the harness from the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 167 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and take...

Page 400: ... pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 169 8 8 8 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 0008 1508 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 TP screws 1 and the binding screw 2 from the rear of the pickup assembly and detach the bracket 3 F 8 170 Pickup Unit 1 F 8 171 Pickup Unit 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw then detach the cassette pickup solenoid 3 3 Remove the bushing and the 5 screws 4 ...

Page 401: ...r Sensor 8 8 9 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6618 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 174 8 8 9 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6658 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 8 175 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 1 2 3 3...

Page 402: ...78 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 179 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 180 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 9 3 Removing the Right Door...

Page 403: ...nst the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 183 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 9 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 0007 6620 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door ...

Page 404: ...t the pickup unit 1 2 F 8 186 8 8 9 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007 6624 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness from the guide then remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 187 8 8 9 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 0007 6625 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 TP screws 1 and the binding screw...

Page 405: ...8 9 8 Removing the Cassette Paper Sensor 0007 6626 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the cassette paper sensor 2 F 8 191 8 8 10 Cassette Paper Level Sensor A B 8 8 10 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6627 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 ...

Page 406: ...he screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 194 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 195 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 196 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 407: ...he hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 10 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7340 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 8 199 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 200 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found...

Page 408: ...door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 202 8 8 10 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6634 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 then free the harness from the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 203 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and take...

Page 409: ... pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 205 8 8 10 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 0007 6637 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 TP screws 1 and the binding screw 2 from the rear of the pickup assembly and detach the bracket 3 F 8 206 Pickup Unit 1 F 8 207 Pickup Unit 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw then detach the cassette pickup solenoid 3 3 Remove the bushing and the 5 screws 4...

Page 410: ...Slide Resistor 8 8 11 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6641 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 210 8 8 11 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6657 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 8 211 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2...

Page 411: ...14 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 215 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 216 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 11 3 Removing the Right Doo...

Page 412: ... of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 219 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 11 4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0007 6644 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the manual upper guide link 1 plastic E ring 2 and boss 3 F 8 220 2 Remove the ...

Page 413: ...nnect the connector 1 5 Remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the manual feed unit 3 F 8 223 F 8 224 8 8 11 5 Removing the Manual Tray Unit 0007 6648 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 1 2 Remove the tie wrap 2 F 8 225 3 Remove the manual feed tray unit 3 F 8 226 ...

Page 414: ...lide resistor 1 connector 2 F 8 228 8 8 12 Cassette Pickup Solenoid 8 8 12 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6652 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 229 8 8 12 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6654 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 8 2...

Page 415: ...33 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 234 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 235 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 12 3 Removing the Right Doo...

Page 416: ...nst the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 238 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 12 4 Removing the Right Cover lower front 0007 6659 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door...

Page 417: ... take out the pickup unit 1 2 F 8 241 8 8 12 6 Removing the Pickup Assembly 2 0007 6662 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness from the guide then remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 242 8 8 12 7 Removing the Cassette Pickup Solenoid 0007 6664 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and re...

Page 418: ...right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 244 8 8 13 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6668 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 8 245 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 246 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 247 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 ...

Page 419: ...gage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 250 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 13 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7347 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 8 251 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the righ...

Page 420: ...Removing the Right Cover lower front 0007 6669 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 254 8 8 13 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6670 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 then f...

Page 421: ... 7 Removing the Cassette Size Sensor Relay PCB 0007 6672 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the PCB cover 1 snap on F 8 258 2 Remove the cassette size sensor relay PCB 2 3 connectors 2 2 clamps 3 F 8 259 8 8 14 Manual Tray Assembly 8 8 14 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6697 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the rig...

Page 422: ...he screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 262 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 263 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 264 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 423: ...the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 14 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7348 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 8 267 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 268 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 foun...

Page 424: ... the Manual Feed Unit 0007 6699 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the manual upper guide link 1 plastic E ring 2 and boss 3 F 8 270 2 Remove the screw 2 and detach the manual feed guide 1 F 8 271 3 Remove the connector cover 1 snap on F 8 272 4 Disconnect the connector 1 5 Remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the manual feed unit 3 F 8 273 ...

Page 425: ...al feed tray unit 3 F 8 276 8 8 15 Manual Feed Unit 8 8 15 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6705 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 277 8 8 15 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6707 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 426: ... 280 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 281 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 282 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate ...

Page 427: ...nector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 285 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 286 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 15 4 Removing...

Page 428: ... snap on F 8 289 4 Disconnect the connector 1 5 Remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the manual feed unit 3 F 8 290 F 8 291 8 8 16 Manual Pickup Roller 8 8 16 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6709 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 ...

Page 429: ...he screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 294 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 295 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 296 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 430: ...the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 16 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7354 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 8 299 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 300 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 foun...

Page 431: ... the Manual Feed Unit 0007 6994 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the manual upper guide link 1 plastic E ring 2 and boss 3 F 8 302 2 Remove the screw 2 and detach the manual feed guide 1 F 8 303 3 Remove the connector cover 1 snap on F 8 304 4 Disconnect the connector 1 5 Remove the 4 screws 2 and detach the manual feed unit 3 F 8 305 ...

Page 432: ...he plastic E ring 4 and detach the manual feed pickup roller from shaft Take care not to drop the parallel pin F 8 308 8 8 17 Manual Pick up Clutch 8 8 17 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6675 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 309 8 8 ...

Page 433: ...ht door F 8 312 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 313 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 314 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate ...

Page 434: ...connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 317 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 318 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 17 4 Remov...

Page 435: ... iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 fastons 1 and detach the main power switch 2 snap on type F 8 320 When connecting the 4 fastons be sure that they are located as indicated by their specific location numbers F 8 321 8 8 17 6 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Clutch 0007 6681 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 2P 1 2 Free the clutch cable 2 from the wire saddle 3 3 Remove the f...

Page 436: ...14 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 324 8 8 18 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6715 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 8 325 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 437: ...28 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 329 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 330 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 18 3 Removing the Right Doo...

Page 438: ...m of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 333 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 18 4 Removing the Manual Feed Unit 0007 6716 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the manual upper guide link 1 plastic E ring 2 and boss 3 F 8 334 2 Remove the...

Page 439: ...8 337 F 8 338 8 8 18 5 Removing the Manual Feed Pickup Roller 0007 6717 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the manual feed upper cover 1 snap on F 8 339 2 Remove the bush 2 and detach the manual feed pickup roller 3 together with the shaft 3 Remove the plastic E ring 4 and detach the manual feed pickup roller from shaft Take care not to drop the parallel pin ...

Page 440: ...0 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 8 342 8 8 19 2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007 6733 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the wire saddle F 8 343 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the mai...

Page 441: ...glued in place 8 8 19 3 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007 7530 iR2270 iR2870 1 Disconnect the 6 connectors 1 2 Free the cable from the 6 cable clamps 2 3 Remove the re use band 3 F 8 345 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main drive assembly 2 F 8 346 ...

Page 442: ...de out the cassette 2 Open the right door in the case of the separation roller 3 Pick the tabs of the individual rollers and detach the pickup roller 1 feed roller 2 and separation roller 3 F 8 348 Point to Note When Replacing the Feed Separation Roller 1 The collar roller core of the machine s feed separation roller is black 8 8 21 Vertical Path Roller 8 8 21 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 ...

Page 443: ...he screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 8 351 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 352 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 353 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 444: ...the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 21 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7359 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 8 356 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 357 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 foun...

Page 445: ... door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the right cover lower front 4 F 8 359 8 8 21 5 Removing the Pickup Assembly 1 0007 6740 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 1 2 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 then free the harness from the 2 wire saddles 2 and the 2 clamps 3 F 8 360 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and tak...

Page 446: ... pickup assembly 2 3 F 8 362 8 8 21 7 Removing the Sensor Mounting Plate 0007 6742 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 TP screws 1 and the binding screw 2 from the rear of the pickup assembly and detach the bracket 3 F 8 363 Pickup Unit 1 F 8 364 Pickup Unit 2 2 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the screw then detach the cassette pickup solenoid 3 3 Remove the bushing and the 5 screws 4...

Page 447: ... the vertical path roller 2 to detach F 8 367 8 8 22 Duplex Feed Roller 2 8 8 22 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 6744 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 368 8 8 22 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6746 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door...

Page 448: ...72 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 373 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 374 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 22 3 Removing the Right Doo...

Page 449: ...t the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 377 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 22 4 Removing the Duplex Feed Roller 2 0007 6748 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Free the coil spring 1 and at the same time remove the E ring 2 to pull out the shaft 3 then detach the dup...

Page 450: ...ear 0007 6750 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 8 381 8 8 23 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6751 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 8 382 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 451: ...85 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 386 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 387 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 23 3 Removing the Right Doo...

Page 452: ... bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 390 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 23 4 Removing the Duplex Feed Sensor 0007 6976 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws w collar 1 and detach the transfer frame 2 F 8 391 2 Disc...

Page 453: ...her screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 8 393 8 8 24 2 Removing the Duplex Feed Clutch 0007 7325 iR2270 iR2870 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the 2 screws 2 then detach the clutch fixing plate 3 F 8 394 2 Remove the duplex feed clutch 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 ...

Page 454: ...right cover rear 4 F 8 396 8 8 25 2 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 6763 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the front cover 1 F 8 397 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4 Remove the RS tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 8 398 8 8 25 3 Removing the Delivery Tray 0007 6765 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Loosen ...

Page 455: ...sion delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 402 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 403 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 404 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found ...

Page 456: ... connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 407 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 408 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 25 6 Remo...

Page 457: ...r 1 from the machine terminal F 8 410 4 Open the Extension Delivery Kit 1 5 Remove the 2 screws 3 6 Remove the 2 screws 2 and close the Extension Delivery Kit F 8 411 7 Pull out the Extension Delivery Kit 1 from the machine F 8 412 8 8 25 7 Removing the Delivery Assembly 1 0007 6776 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the delivery assembly 1 1 3 screws 2 2 stepped screws on the left F 8 413 ...

Page 458: ...e right cover rear 4 F 8 414 8 8 26 2 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 6781 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the front cover 1 F 8 415 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4 Remove the RS tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 8 416 8 8 26 3 Removing the Delivery Tray 0007 6783 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Loose...

Page 459: ...sion delivery unit 2 from the right door F 8 420 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 8 421 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 8 422 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found ...

Page 460: ...ctor 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door F 8 425 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 8 426 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 8 8 26 6 Removing t...

Page 461: ...0 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 8 428 2 Disconcert the 3 connectors 1 F 8 429 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 8 430 4 Detach the fixing unit 1 toward the front F 8 431 When mounting the harness cover 1 be sure to keep the harness 2 within the space 3 indicated in the figure so that the harness 2 will not come into contact with the gear 4 ...

Page 462: ...lacement of the fixing assembly F 8 433 8 8 26 8 Removing the Fixing Delivery Drive Assembly 0007 6792 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 8 434 2 Disconnect the connector 1 of the harness and free the harness from the cable clamp 2 F 8 435 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the fixing delivery drive assembly 1 2 F 8 436 ...

Page 463: ...iR4570 1 Slide out the cassette 2 Open the right door in the case of the separation roller 3 Pick the tabs of the individual rollers and detach the pickup roller 1 feed roller 2 and separation roller 3 F 8 437 Point to Note When Replacing the Feed Separation Roller 1 The collar roller core of the machine s feed separation roller is black ...

Page 464: ......

Page 465: ...Chapter 9 Fixing System ...

Page 466: ......

Page 467: ... 3 2 7 Temperature Control in Response to Change of Paper Size 9 7 9 3 3 Cleaning 9 7 9 3 3 1 Fixing Film Cleaning 9 7 9 3 4 Detecting the Passage of Paper 9 8 9 3 4 1 Detecting the Passage of Paper 9 8 9 4 Protective Functions 9 9 9 4 1 Protective Functions 9 9 9 4 2 Detecting an Error 9 10 9 5 Parts Replacement Procedure 9 12 9 5 1 Fixing Unit 9 12 9 5 1 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 9 12 9 5 ...

Page 468: ...y Sensor 9 38 9 5 5 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 9 38 9 5 5 2 Removing the Grounding Plate 9 39 9 5 5 3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover 9 39 9 5 5 4 Removing the Left Side Plate 9 41 9 5 5 5 Releasing the Locking Plate 9 42 9 5 5 6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit 9 44 9 5 5 7 Removing the Inside Delivery Sensor 9 46 9 5 6 Fixing Film Sensor 9 47 9 5 6 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover...

Page 469: ...nts 0006 6003 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The machine s fixing system has the following major components Item Description Fixing method by fixing film pressure roller Fixing heater plate type heater Control temperature 180 deg C at PSTBY Fixing drive control by control of fixing film speed Fixing temperature detection by main thermistor Protective mechanism by sub thermistor Cleaning method by cle...

Page 470: ...Chapter 9 9 2 F 9 1 1 Fixing heater 2 Fixing film unit 3 Pressure roller 4 Power supply brush 5 Film sensor 6 Delivery roller 7 Fixing inside delivery sensor flag 8 Cleaning roller 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ...

Page 471: ...2 speed and then to normal speed 2 Performs the start up current control 3 Starts measuring the time passed after the machine reaches the target temperature T deg C Target temperature T deg C 200 deg C iR3570 iR4570 190 deg C iR2270 iR2870 4 Starts feeding in the case of printing in plain paper mode 5 Starts feeding when 5 sec have passed after the machine reached the target temperature in the cas...

Page 472: ... iR4570 The rotation cycle of the fixing film is monitored to control the fixing motor to a specific speed When the fixing film rotates and as a result the reflecting member positioned in the loop of the film approaches the speed sensor the machine detects the rotation of the fixing film F 9 2 1 Speed sensor 2 Reflecting member 3 Fixing film driven by fixing motor 4 Pressure roller A Paper feed di...

Page 473: ... paper mode the feeding timing is not changed even if the environment sensor detection temperature is 13 deg C or less 9 3 2 3 Controlling the Power Supply at Start Up 0006 6583 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 When the thermistor detection temperature is 180 deg C or less the power control to compensate for the heater varying according to input voltage and a heater resistor value is performed so as to...

Page 474: ...r is higher than the target control temperature for a specific period of time 0 6 sec the machine will decrease the power ratio if lower it will increase the power rate 9 3 2 5 Changing the Fixing Film Control Temperature 0007 5452 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 When a fixing failure occurs or creases appear the fixing film control temperature can be changed in the service mode as shown below COPIER ...

Page 475: ...9 3 3 Cleaning 9 3 3 1 Fixing Film Cleaning 0007 5300 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Purpose In the event of a jam or when wear on the fixing film advances the fixing film is rotated idly for collection of toner from both the film and the pressure roller to the cleaning roller The timing of control is as follows 1 If the reading of the cleaning counter has exceeded the interval expressed in terms of ...

Page 476: ...70 iR3570 iR4570 The paper passage detection configuration in the fixing unit is shown below F 9 4 When a delay jam of the fixing delivery sensor PS13 occurs the fixing motor is stopped immediately so as to prevent paper from wrapping around the fixing roller The pressure of the fixing film and the pressure roller is released when a jam occurs so that jammed paper can be taken out easily DC contro...

Page 477: ...triac and the relay are turned off The thermo switch is turned off 2 When the CPU goes out of control The latch circuit detects the excessive temperature rise and the relay is turned off The thermo switch is turned off 3 When the triac short circuits Software detects failure and the relay is turned off The latch circuit detects the excessive temperature rise and the relay is turned off The thermo ...

Page 478: ...ts overheating A hardware circuit detects overheating in relation to the thermistor main or sub 0002 The sub thermistor detects overheating The thermistor detects 295 deg C or more for 200 msec or more continuously E002 0000 The fixing temperature fails to reach a specific level In the course of start up control the thermistor detects a temperature lower then 115 deg C for 200 msec continuously af...

Page 479: ...100 deg C with the fixing motor in a locked state and in addition the machine fails to detect the marker signal for 6 sec E014 0000 The machine detects a fixing motor error During operation the machine detects an overload condition continuously for 3 sec or more Error code Detail code Symptom Description ...

Page 480: ...right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 9 6 9 5 1 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 7879 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 9 7 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 9 8 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 9 9 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4...

Page 481: ...the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 9 12 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 9 5 1 3 Removing the Right Door 0007 7882 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 9 13 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right door ...

Page 482: ... the hook found on the side plate F 9 15 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 9 5 1 4 Removing the Fixing Unit 0007 7884 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 9 16 2 Disconcert the 3 connectors 1 F 9 17 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 9 18 4 Detach the fixing unit 1 toward the front ...

Page 483: ... which cannot be adjusted in the field necessitating the replacement of the fixing assembly F 9 21 9 5 2 Pressure Roller 9 5 2 1 Removing the Inside Delivery Cover Unit 0007 7910 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the inside delivery cover unit 2 F 9 22 If you are mounting the inside delivery cover while assembling the fixing assembly be sure to keep the guide 1 butted ...

Page 484: ...24 9 5 2 3 Removing the Fixing Film Cover 0007 7912 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 3 screws 1 and remove the self tapping screw 2 then detach the fixing film cover 3 F 9 25 F 9 26 When mounting the fixing film cover unit be sure to check that it has not ridden over the emboss 1 indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening the screw F 9 27 ...

Page 485: ... and detach the left side plate cover 2 F 9 29 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 9 30 3 Slide the left side plate 1 in the direction of the arrow to detach F 9 31 F 9 32 When mounting the left side plate be sure that it is correctly positioned so that the locking lever and the teeth are correctly engaged See the figure F 9 33 ...

Page 486: ...e Turning the screw will change the pressure of the fixing assembly which cannot be adjusted in the field necessitating the replacement of the fixing assembly F 9 36 3 Turn the locking plate 1 in the direction of the arrow to release it F 9 37 9 5 2 6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit 0007 7915 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 While pushing down the release lever front 1 pull out the heater contact 2 F 9...

Page 487: ...9 41 5 Free the relay connector 1 of the signal cable from the connector holder 2 F 9 42 6 Disconnect the connector 2 from the relay connector 1 F 9 43 7 Remove the fixing film unit 1 F 9 44 9 5 2 7 Removing the Inlet Guide 0007 7916 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Slide the inlet guide 1 in the direction of the arrow to detach ...

Page 488: ...bush 1 found at the rear in the direction of the arrow to free it then detach the pressure roller F 9 48 Be sure to pay attention to the position and the orientation of the insulating bush F 9 49 The insulating bush may be of 2 different shapes one for the iR3570 4570 and the other for the iR2270 2870 If the machine is an iR2270 2870 be sure to pay attention to the direction of the protrusion of t...

Page 489: ...he inside delivery cover while assembling the fixing assembly be sure to keep the guide 1 butted during the work After mounting it check to make sure that the guide 1 rotates smoothly F 9 52 9 5 3 2 Removing the Cleaning Roller 0007 7891 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 self tapping screws 1 and detach the cleaning roller together with the cleaning roller holder 2 F 9 53 2 Remove the cle...

Page 490: ... inside delivery cover unit 2 F 9 55 If you are mounting the inside delivery cover while assembling the fixing assembly be sure to keep the guide 1 butted during the work After mounting it check to make sure that the guide 1 rotates smoothly F 9 56 9 5 4 2 Removing the Grounding Plate 0007 7899 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 F 9 57 9 5 4 3 Remo...

Page 491: ...at it has not ridden over the emboss 1 indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening the screw F 9 60 F 9 61 9 5 4 4 Removing the Left Side Plate 0007 7901 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the left side plate cover 2 F 9 62 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 9 63 ...

Page 492: ... the figure F 9 66 9 5 4 5 Releasing the Locking Plate 0007 7902 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Turn the locking gear 1 in the direction of the arrow to release the locking roller F 9 67 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 9 68 Do not touch the screw 1 used to keep the fixing assembly in place Turning the screw will change the pressure of the fixing assembly which cannot be adjusted in the field necessitatin...

Page 493: ...R3570 iR4570 1 While pushing down the release lever front 1 pull out the heater contact 2 F 9 71 2 While pushing down the release lever rear 1 pull out the heater contact 2 F 9 72 3 Remove the screw 1 and free the AC harness 2 F 9 73 4 Free the AC harness 1 from the edge saddle 2 F 9 74 5 Free the relay connector 1 of the signal cable from the connector holder 2 ...

Page 494: ...3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the inside delivery cover unit 2 F 9 78 If you are mounting the inside delivery cover while assembling the fixing assembly be sure to keep the guide 1 butted during the work After mounting it check to make sure that the guide 1 rotates smoothly F 9 79 9 5 5 2 Removing the Grounding Plate 0007 7924 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 an...

Page 495: ...hen detach the fixing film cover 3 F 9 81 F 9 82 When mounting the fixing film cover unit be sure to check that it has not ridden over the emboss 1 indicated by the arrow in the figure before tightening the screw F 9 83 F 9 84 9 5 5 4 Removing the Left Side Plate 0007 7926 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the left side plate cover 2 ...

Page 496: ...mounting the left side plate be sure that it is correctly positioned so that the locking lever and the teeth are correctly engaged See the figure F 9 89 9 5 5 5 Releasing the Locking Plate 0007 7927 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Turn the locking gear 1 in the direction of the arrow to release the locking roller F 9 90 2 Remove the 2 screws 1 ...

Page 497: ... assembly F 9 92 3 Turn the locking plate 1 in the direction of the arrow to release it F 9 93 9 5 5 6 Removing the Fixing Film Unit 0007 7929 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 While pushing down the release lever front 1 pull out the heater contact 2 F 9 94 2 While pushing down the release lever rear 1 pull out the heater contact 2 F 9 95 3 Remove the screw 1 and free the AC harness 2 F 9 96 4 Free t...

Page 498: ...onnector 2 from the relay connector 1 F 9 99 7 Remove the fixing film unit 1 F 9 100 9 5 5 7 Removing the Inside Delivery Sensor 0007 7932 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 2 of the harness 1 F 9 101 2 Remove the front latch 2 of the inside delivery sensor 1 then detach the inside delivery sensor F 9 102 ...

Page 499: ...ile assembling the fixing assembly be sure to keep the guide 1 butted during the work After mounting it check to make sure that the guide 1 rotates smoothly F 9 104 9 5 6 2 Removing the Grounding Plate 0007 7896 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 F 9 105 9 5 6 3 Removing the Fixing Film Sensor 0007 7897 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the scre...

Page 500: ...Chapter 9 9 32 F 9 107 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the fixing film sensor 2 F 9 108 ...

Page 501: ...Chapter 10 External and Controls ...

Page 502: ......

Page 503: ... of the Controller Power Supply PCB 10 12 10 4 2 3 Rated Output of the Accessories Power Supply PCB 10 12 10 4 2 4 Rated Output of the All Night Power Supply PCB 10 13 10 4 3 Protection Function 10 13 10 4 3 1 Protective Mechanisms 10 13 10 4 4 Backup Battery 10 13 10 4 4 1 Backup Battery 10 13 10 4 5 Energy Saving Function 10 14 10 4 5 1 Overview 10 14 10 4 5 2 Machine as Supplied with Power 10 1...

Page 504: ...r Supply PCB 10 42 10 5 10 Controller Power Supply PCB 10 43 10 5 10 1 Removing the Rear Cover 10 43 10 5 10 2 Removing the Left Cover lower 10 44 10 5 10 3 Removing the Left Cover Rear 10 44 10 5 10 4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB 10 44 10 5 10 5 Removing the Controller Power Supply PCB 10 45 10 5 11 Option Power Supply PCB 10 46 10 5 11 1 Removing the Rear Cover 10 46 10 5 11 2 Remov...

Page 505: ...g the Main Drive Assembly 10 77 10 5 14 3 Removing the Main Drive Motor 10 78 10 5 14 4 Removing the Main Drive Motor 10 80 10 5 15 Fixing Driver Motor 10 81 10 5 15 1 Removing the Rear Cover 10 81 10 5 15 2 Removing the DC Controller PCB 10 81 10 5 15 3 Removing the Fixing Drive Motor 10 83 10 5 16 Right Door 10 84 10 5 16 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 10 84 10 5 16 2 Removing the Right Door 10...

Page 506: ......

Page 507: ... input F 10 1 10 1 2 LCD Indication Processing 0006 6160 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The CPU on the main controlled PCB sends data display data to the control panel CPU PCB as instructed by the program The data is sent through the control panel PCB to reach the color LCD Main controller PCB Control panel CPU PCB Touch panel Color LCD Keypad PCB Control panel inverter PCB J1018A J1018B J2117A J2117...

Page 508: ...Panel CPU 0006 6162 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Monitoring the Key Inputs It communicates the keypad and function key inputs to the CPU on the main controller PCB Monitoring the Touch Panel Input It communicates the key inputs made on the touch panel to the CPU on the main controller PCB Controlling the Buzzer Sound Controlling the Control Panel LED Memo the color LCD is driven by the main control...

Page 509: ...pan 1 total 1 not indicated not indicated not indicated not indicated not indicated 101 000 000 000 000 000 Japan 1 total 2 copy total 2 total A total 2 not indicated not indicated not indicated 102 202 127 000 000 000 120VTW 2 total 1 total large copy total 1 copy large not indicated not indicated 101 103 201 203 000 000 120V UL 3 total 1 total large copy total 1 copy large not indicated not indi...

Page 510: ...61 5468 5461 by default not indicated may be changed in service mode 1 is set for the following service mode item COPIER OPTION USE CNT SW 1 is set for the following service mode item COPIER OPTION USER CNT SW 10 2 2 Timing of Increasing the Count 0006 5385 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The timing at which the count is increased differs depending on the printing mode single sided or double sided tar...

Page 511: ...t feed sensor PS17 goes on the machine will assume that printing on the 1st side has been completed thereby increasing the count Tray 2 No 2 delivery sensor PS1A Tray 3 No 3 delivery sensor PS5 Finisher present Delivery sensor of the finisher Condition Target of delivery Sensor ...

Page 512: ...eed Control 0006 5389 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The rotation of the 2 fans used in the machine is controlled to 2 different speeds by the voltage switchover circuit of the individual fans Notation Name Filter 2 speed control Description FM1 Heat discharge fan rear Present Used Cools the fixing assembly FM2 Heat discharge fan front Present Used Cools the fixing assembly FM2 FM1 ...

Page 513: ...g T 10 4 Single Sided Printing T 10 5 Note 1 While the machine is in continuous printing mode the insertion of one or more double sided prints will start the control used for double sided printing Note 2 The printing interval covers the interval up to when the fixing motor M3 stops rotation Environment sensor HU1 reading Full speed half speed 25 deg C or more Full speed Less than 25 deg C Half spe...

Page 514: ...plies power to the side paper deck buffer path and finisher Main switch Turns on off the power to the AC driver PCB Door switch Turns on off 24 VU1 to the DC controller PCB Leakage breaker Cuts power in the event of an error Environment heater switch PCB Turns on off power to the cassette heater printer unit heater and deck heater Optional High voltage power supply PCB Generate various high voltag...

Page 515: ...o Finisher S1 Heater switch SW5 Cassette heater H4 Deck heater H7 Cassette pedestal H1C Reader heater H6 Leakage breaker ELCB2 Main switch SW1 Heater switch PCB Pickup heater mounting kit Reader heater H5 AC driver PCB Accessories power supply PCB All night power supply PCB Printer power supply PCB Fixing main heater H1 Fixing sub heater H2 Thermal switch TP1 Controller power supply PCB 13VA2 24VU...

Page 516: ...0 iR3570 iR4570 The following diagram shows the connections between the printer unit and the various accessories used for the J510 J504 J502 J503 J500 J501 J505 Printer unit controller PCB To DF To printer unit scanner PCB DC24V AC100V AC100V DC13V DC24V DC13V 3 3V 24 VDC 13 VDC From printer unit 100 VAC From printer unit Generates 5 VDC from 13 VDC Generates 3 3 VDC from 13 VDC To DF PSTBY SCAN D...

Page 517: ...ble 5 Side deck heater cable 6 Side deck I F cable 7 Cassette pedestal I F cable 8 AC input A DADF N1 B Printer unit C Printer unit D 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 E Side Paper Deck Q1 10 4 2 Rated Output of the DC Power Supply PCB 10 4 2 1 Rated Output of the Printer Unit Power Supply PCB 0006 5642 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 E 7 6 5 D 4 3 C B A 2 1 8 ...

Page 518: ...y PCB 0006 5644 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The following are the ratings and the power supply tolerances of the accessories power supply PCB T 10 9 Output 13VA1 13VA2 13VB 24VU1 24VU2 All night non all night non all night non all night non all night non all night Rated output 13 2V 13 2V 13 2V 24V Power supply tolerance 3 3 3 5 5 0 1 to 8A 8 6 from 0A to 0 1 A from 8A to 10A Output 3VA 5VA All ni...

Page 519: ...l supplies of power will be shut off A fault in other power supplies will shut off power to all loads except for 3 VB If a malfunction occurs in 3VB all night power supply it is necessary to turn off the main power switch of the printer unit remove the cause triggering the protection circuit and replace the all night power supply PCB The fuse of the all night power supply PCB is likely to have blo...

Page 520: ...s ready for immediate operation 2 Sleep Mode 2 1 Sleep 1 When the machine is in sleep mode 1 its control panel remains off and the polygon motor M1 will not rotate even when any of the control panel keys is pressed In this mode the machine is provided with power as in standby mode 2 2 Sleep 3 When the machine is in sleep mode 3 only 3 VB is available The machine will move to standby mode from slee...

Page 521: ...570 iR4570 Standby Mode Sleep Mode AC Off Mode T 10 12 Stand by mode Sleep mode AC off mode 1 3 Remote 1 ON ON OFF OFF Remote 2 ON ON OFF OFF Reader unit non all night 13VA2 ON ON OFF OFF non all night 24VU2 ON ON OFF OFF CPU SDRAM LAN controller block Image processing block Control panel power switch Fax reception detector Hard disk drive Scanner unit Printer unit powered in sleep 3 not powered i...

Page 522: ... OFF non all night 5VA ON ON OFF OFF non all night 13VA1 ON ON OFF OFF non all night 24VU1 ON ON OFF OFF non all night 24VU2 ON ON OFF OFF Main controller PCB non all night 3VA ON ON OFF OFF all night 3VB ON ON ON OFF non all night 5VA ON ON OFF OFF non all night 12VA ON ON OFF OFF Fax all night 5VS ON ON ON OFF non all night 13VA1 ON ON OFF OFF non all night 24VU2 ON ON OFF OFF Stand by mode Slee...

Page 523: ...h the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 9 10 5 1 2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007 6424 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the wire saddle F 10 10 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main drive assembly 2 F 10 11 Do not touch the screws that are glued in place 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 ...

Page 524: ...ve the re use band 3 F 10 12 4 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main drive assembly 2 F 10 13 10 5 2 Power Supply Unit 10 5 2 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6375 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed ...

Page 525: ...crew 3 then detach the left cover lower 4 If the rear cover has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 15 10 5 2 3 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB 0007 6378 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector J640 1 F 10 16 2 Remove the 6 connectors 1 and free the harness from the cable clamp 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 2 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 526: ...379 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the finisher connector 2 F 10 19 2 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the pedestal connector 2 F 10 20 3 Free the harness 1 of the pedestal connector from the lamp 2 F 10 21 4 Disconnect the 7 connectors 1 and free the harness from the 4 clamps 2 F 10 22 5 Free the harness 1 from the clamp 2 ...

Page 527: ...2 F 10 24 10 5 3 Control Panel 10 5 3 1 Removing the Control Panel 0007 6426 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 F 10 25 2 Open the right door 1 F 10 26 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 27 4 Slide the control panel 1 in the direction of the arrow ...

Page 528: ...h the control panel F 10 30 10 5 4 Control Panel LCD Unit 10 5 4 1 Removing the Control Panel 0007 7569 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 F 10 31 2 Open the right door 1 F 10 32 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 33 4 Slide the control panel 1 in the direction of the arrow ...

Page 529: ...0007 7573 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors between the control panel PCB and the control panel key switch PCB then free the harness from the 2 clamps 2 2 Disconnect the 2 connectors 3 between the control panel PCB and the control panel LCD Be sure to move the stopper in the direction of the arrow to detach These 2 stoppers are moved in different directions 3 Disconnect the...

Page 530: ... PCB 10 5 5 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 7370 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 41 10 5 5 2 Removing the DC Controller PCB 0007 6398 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 10 42 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 ...

Page 531: ...Controller PCB Be sure to remove the boot ROM 1 from the exiting DC controller PCB and mount it to the new DC controller PCB F 10 45 10 5 6 Control Panel Inverter PCB 10 5 6 1 Removing the Control Panel 0007 6428 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 F 10 46 2 Open the right door 1 F 10 47 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 48 ...

Page 532: ...over 0007 6430 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the control panel base cover 2 F 10 52 10 5 6 3 Removing the Control Panel Inverter PCB 0007 6466 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the control panel inverter PCB 1 3 connectors 2 4 screws 3 F 10 53 10 5 7 Control Panel Key Switch PCB 10 5 7 1 Removing the Control Panel 0007 6437 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove t...

Page 533: ... panel 1 in the direction of the arrow F 10 57 5 Free the harness 2 from the clamp 1 F 10 58 6 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the control panel F 10 59 10 5 7 2 Removing the Control Panel Base Cover 0007 6438 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the control panel base cover 2 ...

Page 534: ... the 2 connectors 4 of the control panel inverter PCB 4 Remove the control panel inside frame 1 1 TP screw 2 11 self tapping screws 3 10 5 7 4 Removing the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 0007 6451 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the 2 connectors 3 between the control panel PCB and the control panel LCD Be sure to move the stopper in the direction of the arrow These 2 stoppers must be moved ...

Page 535: ...R2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the rubber cap 1 and remove the screw 2 F 10 64 2 Open the right door 1 F 10 65 3 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 66 4 Slide the control panel 1 in the direction of the arrow F 10 67 5 Free the harness 2 from the clamp 1 F 10 68 6 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the control panel ...

Page 536: ...connect the 2 connectors 2 used between the control panel PCB and the control panel LCD Be sure to move the stopper in the direction of the arrow Each of the 2 stoppers has its own direction of movement 3 Disconnect the control panel cable 4 4 Remove the 4 TP screws 5 and detach the control panel PCB 7 F 10 71 10 5 9 All Night Power Supply PCB 10 5 9 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6385 iR2270 iR28...

Page 537: ...crews 1 and detach the all night power supply PCB 2 F 10 74 10 5 10 Controller Power Supply PCB 10 5 10 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6380 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 ...

Page 538: ...r lower 4 If the rear cover has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 76 10 5 10 3 Removing the Left Cover Rear 0007 6382 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the left cover rear 2 F 10 77 10 5 10 4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB 0007 6383 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector J640 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3...

Page 539: ...ply PCB 0007 6384 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 1 F 10 81 2 Remove the 6 screws 1 and detach the controller power supply PCB 2 F 10 82 10 5 11 Option Power Supply PCB 10 5 11 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6370 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the s...

Page 540: ...r lower 4 If the rear cover has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 84 10 5 11 3 Removing the Left Cover Rear 0007 6372 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 then detach the left cover rear 2 F 10 85 10 5 11 4 Removing the Accessories Power Supply PCB 0007 6373 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector J640 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3...

Page 541: ...tage PCB 10 5 12 1 Removing the Front Cover Unit 0007 8021 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the front cover 1 F 10 89 2 Remove the face cover rubber 1 3 Remove the binding screw 2 4 Remove the RS tightening screw 3 5 Detach the front cover unit 4 by moving it in the direction of the arrow F 10 90 10 5 12 2 Removing the Waste Toner Case 0007 8028 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the waste ton...

Page 542: ...0 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Shift up the lever 1 F 10 93 2 Remove the toner cartridge 1 F 10 94 Points to Note on Handing the Toner Cartridge 1 Care should be taken not to bump the toner stop 1 against the covers or the like when and after removing the toner cartridge Since the toner stop comes off easily toner scattering may be resulted if it comes off by accident 2 Keep the toner cartridge h...

Page 543: ...270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door 1 F 10 96 2 Remove the screw 1 F 10 97 3 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 10 98 4 Remove the screw 1 F 10 99 5 Remove the drum unit 1 F 10 100 Be sure to hold the drum unit as shown 1 ...

Page 544: ...R2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 F 10 102 2 Shift the locking lever 1 to the left to release the developing assembly F 10 103 3 Slide the developing assembly 1 slightly to the front then disconnect the connector 2 F 10 104 4 Remove the developing assembly 1 F 10 105 ...

Page 545: ...ly so that A of the developing assembly matches B of the rail F 10 107 10 5 12 6 Removing the Upper Tray 0007 8403 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the upper tray 2 F 10 108 Reference Lift the front of the upper tray 1 and detach it as if to slide it toward the front F 10 109 10 5 12 7 Removing the Toner Cartridge Cover 0007 8404 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove t...

Page 546: ... 10 111 2 While freeing the lock 1 toward the right detach the pre exposure lamp 2 F 10 112 F 10 113 10 5 12 9 Removing the Left Cover 0007 8407 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the left cover 2 F 10 114 10 5 12 10 Removing the Laser Unit 0007 8409 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the 2 wire saddles 1 and disconnect the 2 connectors 2 1 1 1 2 ...

Page 547: ...ct the connector 2 F 10 116 3 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing 2 F 10 117 4 Lift the front of the laser unit 1 and slide it to the front F 10 118 When sliding out the laser scanner unit be sure to take care not to touch the PCB mounted to the laser scanner unit The PCB is equipped with a laser scanner intensity adjustment variable resistor and contact with the PCB can change the adjustment...

Page 548: ... F 10 122 When fitting the hopper assembly to the machine be sure that the connectors 1 are securely connected If the connectors 1 are not connected the environment heater will not be supplied with power leading to image faults F 10 123 10 5 12 12 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 8412 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open th...

Page 549: ...the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 10 126 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 10 127 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening F 10 128 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 550: ...g the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 12 14 Removing the Right Door 0007 8416 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 10 131 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 10 132 3 Remove the joint shaft 1 and free the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 10 133 4 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 ...

Page 551: ...he hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 10 136 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 12 15 Removing the Right Door 0007 8417 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 10 137 2 Remove the reuse band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 3 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening and detach the right ...

Page 552: ...e hook found on the side plate F 10 139 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 12 16 Removing the Fixing Unit 0007 8419 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 10 140 2 Disconcert the 3 connectors 1 F 10 141 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 10 142 4 Detach the fixing unit 1 toward the front ...

Page 553: ... contact with the gear 4 F 10 144 Do not touch the screw 1 Turning it will change the pressure of the fixing assembly which cannot be adjusted in the field necessitating the replacement of the fixing assembly F 10 145 10 5 12 17 Removing the Gear 0007 8420 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the gear cover 2 F 10 146 2 Remove the gear 1 F 10 147 ...

Page 554: ...148 2 Slide the guide 1 as shown to detach F 10 149 3 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the latch 2 and 3 screws 3 then detach the high voltage PCB 4 F 10 150 F 10 151 10 5 13 Exhaust Fan 10 5 13 1 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan 0007 6433 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 10 152 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 F 10 153 A B C ...

Page 555: ...nd detach the heat discharge fan 2 F 10 156 10 5 13 2 Removing the Heat Discharge Fan 0007 7531 iR2270 iR2870 1 Open the right door F 10 157 2 Remove the 2 self tapping screws 2 and detach the upper right cover 1 F 10 158 3 Remove the self tapping screw 1 and detach the feed guide 2 F 10 159 4 Remove the 7 screws 1 and detach the feed guide lower 2 ...

Page 556: ...ove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed F 10 162 10 5 14 2 Removing the Main Drive Assembly 0007 6418 iR3570 iR4570 1 Disconnect the connector 1 and free the harness 2 from the wire saddle F 10 163 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main drive assembly 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1...

Page 557: ...ve motor 2 F 10 165 Points to Note During the Work Be sure that the 2 timing belts 2 are fitted to the shaft 1 of the main drive motor as shown F 10 166 Adjusting the Tension of the Main Drive Motor 1 Temporarily fix the main drive motor in place to the main motor base 2 So that the motor gear 1 and the teeth 2 of the pulley mesh correctly move the motor in the direction of the arrow ...

Page 558: ...sconnect the 2 connectors 1 F 10 169 2 Remove the 4 screws 1 and detach the main dive motor 2 F 10 170 10 5 15 Fixing Driver Motor 10 5 15 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6403 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cover lower has already been detached the screw 3 should also have been removed ...

Page 559: ...nnector 1 F 10 172 How to Remove the Flexible Cable 1 F 10 173 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the DC controller PCB F 10 174 Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB Be sure to remove the boot ROM 1 from the exiting DC controller PCB and mount it to the new DC controller PCB F 10 175 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 ...

Page 560: ...6 Right Door 10 5 16 1 Removing the Right Cover rear 0007 7020 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 2 Open the right lower door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 10 178 10 5 16 2 Removing the Right Door 0007 6444 iR3570 iR4570 1 Open the right door F 10 179 2 Remove the screw 1 and detach the fixing plate...

Page 561: ...182 5 While freeing the hinge assembly 2 detach the right door F 10 183 Attaching the Right Door 1 Match the hinge 1 found at the bottom of the right door against the lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 10 184 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 16 3 Removing the Right...

Page 562: ...he lug 2 Engage the hinge 2 found on the top of the right door with the hook found on the side plate F 10 187 When tightening the 2 screws used to fix the hinge in place be sure to close the right door first 10 5 17 Circuit Braker 10 5 17 1 Removing the Rear Cover 0007 6388 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 13 screws 1 and then the other screw 2 then detach the rear cover 3 If the left cove...

Page 563: ...70 iR3570 iR4570 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 F 10 189 2 Remove the 4 fastons 1 and detach the circuit breaker 2 F 10 190 Points to Note When Mounting When mounting the circuit breaker be sure that the AC harness is identified correctly by color as shown F 10 191 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 ...

Page 564: ......

Page 565: ...Chapter 11 MEAP ...

Page 566: ......

Page 567: ...Contents Contents 11 1 Overview 11 1 11 2 MEAP Counter 11 2 11 3 Construction of the MEAP Platform 11 4 ...

Page 568: ......

Page 569: ...architecture is based on Java J2ME i e Java 2 Platform Micro Edition and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications A MEAP application behaves independently from its host printer s system software and may be installed or uninstalled using SMS Service Management Service which is an interface that runs as part of the browser on a PC As long as the device supports MEAP most MEAP applica...

Page 570: ...o display all depend on the application in question A counter reading may be of a type that is forced to increase as a job is expected or of a type that is increased when the application sends instructions or it may be of a type that increases independently of the host device thus increasing solely in response to the application being run specifics are as follows T 11 1 Type Count item forced tota...

Page 571: ...se to execution of a job in response to instructions from application the counter increases its reading only in response to instructions from the application application independent the counter operates according to the specifications of the application free 12 Type Count item ...

Page 572: ...se of a mismatch the device will not be able to run the MEAP application For version information refer to the Service Information bulletin that is released in conjunction with the system software The following shows the components of a MEAP application F 11 1 1 User Interface Control Bock installed as part of the system software 2 Device Control Block installed as part of the system software 3 Ope...

Page 573: ...Chapter 12 Maintenance and Inspection ...

Page 574: ......

Page 575: ...cedure 12 5 12 3 1 Scheduled Servicing for the Reader Unit 12 5 12 3 2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit 12 5 12 3 3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedures 12 8 12 3 4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing 12 10 12 4 Cleaning 12 12 12 4 1 Cleaning the Transfer Feed Guide 12 12 12 4 2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer Feed Guide Dust 12 12 12 4 3 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Elim...

Page 576: ......

Page 577: ...performance regardless of the presence absence of external changes or damage If possible schedule the replacement so that it coincides with a scheduled service visit The timing of replacement may vary depending on the site environment or user habit 12 1 2 Reader Unit 0007 4596 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The reader unit does not have parts that require periodical replacement 12 1 3 Printer Unit 00...

Page 578: ...lowing service mode item to check the timing of replacement Copier COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 COPIER COUNTER MISC Accessory COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 12 2 2 Reader Unit 0007 4599 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 The reader unit does not have parts that are classified as durables 12 2 3 Printer Unit 0007 4600 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 T 12 1 As of Sept 2004 Ref Parts name Parts No Q t y Life Remarks 1 Transfer...

Page 579: ...ssure roller FC5 7207 000 1 240 000 prints iR3570 4570 6 Waste toner box FM2 0303 000 1 75 000 prints iR2270 2870 Waste toner box FM2 0303 000 1 85 000 prints iR3570 4570 7 Fixing heat discharge roller FB5 4931 000 1 150 000 prints iR2270 2870 Fixing heat discharge roller FB5 4931 000 1 240 000 prints iR3570 4570 8 Pickup roller FB6 3405 000 2 120 000 prints 9 Feed separation roller FC5 6934 000 4...

Page 580: ...0 000 prints iR2270 2870 The value is the mean value collected from the results of evaluation The parts number may change because of changes in design As of Sept 2004 Ref Parts name Parts No Q t y Life Remarks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 9 9 9 9 11 10 12 12 13 13 ...

Page 581: ...eduled servicing Be sure to clean the copyboard glass and the ADF reading glass during every service visit 12 3 2 Scheduled Servicing for the Printer Unit 0007 5176 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Do not use solvents or oils other than those indicated T 12 2 Tran sfer asse mbly Location Transfer feed guide assembly Task clean dry wiping Interval 120 000 prints Remarks 1 Feed guide 2 Transfer guide ...

Page 582: ...Deve lopin g asse mbly Location Photosensitive drum butting spacer feed guide Task clean dry wiping Interval 120 000 prints Remarks 1 Photosensitive drum butting spacer 2 Feed guide ...

Page 583: ...t guide Task clean dry wiping alcohol Interval 120 000 prints Remarks 1 Fixing inlet guide Location Film bias static eliminator Task clean Interval 150 000 prints iR2270 2870 240 000 prints iR3570 4570 Remarks 1 Film bias static eliminator ...

Page 584: ...ily smoke the resulting buildup can prove to be a fire hazard The buildup of dust for instance can absorb moisture and suffer insulating failure Be sure to disconnect the power plug on a periodical basis and remove any buildup of dust and dirt with a dry cloth Work Procedure 1 Report to the person in change and have an understanding of the situation 2 Record the counter reading and check the fault...

Page 585: ...the test switch of the leakage breaker to see if the breaker operates normally i e the lever will shift to OFF to cut off the power If the leakage breaker fails to operate normally replace the breaker and make a check once again Resetting When you have checked the operation of the leakage breaker turn off the power switch shift the lever to ON and turn on the power switch Item Test copy image dens...

Page 586: ...arge be sure also to indicate the check on the leakage breaker in the history of checks 12 3 4 Points to Note About the Scheduled Servicing 0007 5177 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 If you used solvent be sure that it has dried before putting the part back into the machine Unless otherwise indicated do not use a cloth moistened with water Be sure to provide scheduled servicing at specific intervals F ...

Page 587: ...xing inlet guide clean dry wiping alcohol 4 Photosensitive drum butting spacer clean dry wiping 5 Dust blocking glass clean dry wiping or with alcohol 6 Waste toner collection case check 7 Leakage breaker check 8 Film bias static eliminator clean ...

Page 588: ...0 1 Open the right door F 12 3 2 Clean dry wipe the feed guide 1 and the transfer guide 2 F 12 4 3 Close the right door 12 4 2 Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer Feed Guide Dust Blocking Glass and Fixing Inlet Guide 0007 5128 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 A Preparatory Work 1 Open the upper front cover 1 ...

Page 589: ...Chapter 12 12 13 F 12 5 2 Remove the face rubber 1 and the 2 screws 2 then slide the front cover unit 3 to the left to detach F 12 6 3 Remove the waste toner box 1 F 12 7 4 Open the right door 1 ...

Page 590: ... 12 12 14 F 12 8 5 Remove the locking screw 1 of the pressure lever F 12 9 6 Shift the locking lever 1 of the developing assembly to the left to release the developing assembly F 12 10 7 Remove the screw M5 1 ...

Page 591: ... 1 F 12 12 Do not touch the surface of the photosensitive drum Do not expose the surface of the photosensitive drum to light more than necessary Do not touch the spur of the drum unit 9 Disconnect the connector 1 and detach the developing assembly 2 ...

Page 592: ...nd the Feed Guide 1 Clean the developing assembly spacer 1 and the feed guide 2 Dry wipe them using lint free paper F 12 14 C Cleaning the Dust Blocking Glass 1 Clean the dust blocking glass 1 Dry wipe it or use alcohol F 12 15 D Cleaning the Fixing Inlet Guide ...

Page 593: ...ixing inlet guide upper 1 with alcohol Be sure to completely remove all toner sticking to the fixing inlet guide upper F 12 17 3 Clean the fixing inlet guide lower 1 using lint free paper F 12 18 4 Mount the fixing inlet guide upper using a screw w washer E After the Work 1 Put the drum unit 1 in the machine 1 ...

Page 594: ...achine 3 1 Place segment A of the developing assembly on segment B of the developing assembly rail 3 2 By sliding the base 2 of the developing assembly 1 along the developing assembly rail 3 fit the assembly in place inside the machine F 12 21 4 Connect the connector 1 and push the developing assembly 2 all the way in ...

Page 595: ...22 5 Shift back the locking lever 1 of the developing assembly to the right to lock the assembly in place F 12 23 6 Fit and tighten the screw 1 of the locking lever F 12 24 7 Close the right door 8 Fit the waste toner box 1 ...

Page 596: ... 9 Mount the front cover unit 3 using 2 screws 2 and fit the face rubber 1 At this time be sure to slide it to the right so that the claw of the front cover matches the machine F 12 26 10 Close the upper front cover 1 F 12 27 ...

Page 597: ...0 A Removing the Right Door 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if w Cassette Feeding Unit 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 12 28 4 Open the right door F 12 29 5 Remove the self tapping screw 1 and detach the fixing plate 2 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 598: ... 1 and detach the extension delivery unit 2 from the right door F 12 31 7 Disconnect the connector 1 and remove the reuse band 2 then remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening 3 F 12 32 8 Free and detach the right door 1 from the hinge assembly 2 F 12 33 ...

Page 599: ...12 23 B Removing the Fixing Assembly 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 12 34 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 F 12 35 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 12 36 4 Remove the fixing unit 1 toward the front ...

Page 600: ...move the 2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 F 12 38 2 Clean the film bias static eliminator 1 found behind the grounding plate to remove the cake of toner if any that may have collected on the static eliminator F 12 39 3 Mount the grounding plate 2 with 2 screws 1 ...

Page 601: ...Chapter 12 12 25 F 12 40 D Mounting the Fixing Assembly 1 Mount the fixing unit 1 to the machine frame F 12 41 2 Secure the fixing assembly in place using 4 screws 1 F 12 42 3 Connect the 3 connectors 1 ...

Page 602: ...ing the Right Door 1 Match the hole 1 of the right door bottom and the pin 2 F 12 45 2 Match the mounting plate 1 of the right door top against the hook 2 and mount the right door 3 Secure the mounting plate 1 using 3 screws 3 4 Connect the connector 4 and fit the reuse band 5 in place ...

Page 603: ...livery kit 1 slightly to match it against the right door 2 F 12 47 When matching the position take care so that the expansion delivery kit will not open wider than 80 deg 7 Push in the pin 1 through the hole 2 until it stops then connect the expansion delivery kit 3 to the right door 4 ...

Page 604: ...n is fully fitted as shown in the figure 8 Using the self tapping screw 1 you removed in step A 5 fix the joint plate 2 in place Check to be sure that the protrusion 3 of the joint plate is fully in the mounting hole F 12 50 10 Mount the right cover rear using 5 screws ...

Page 605: ... right door 12 4 4 Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator 0008 2928 iR2270 iR2870 A Removing the Right Door 1 Open the pedestal right door 1 if equipped with a Cassette Feeding Unit Y2 2 Open the lower right door 2 3 Remove the 5 screws 3 and detach the right cover rear 4 F 12 52 4 Open the right door 1 2 3 3 3 4 ...

Page 606: ...use band 1 and disconnect the connector 2 6 Remove the 2 screws M4x8 RS tightening 3 then detach the right door F 12 54 B Removing the Fixing Assembly 1 Remove the screw 1 and detach the harness cover 2 F 12 55 2 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 ...

Page 607: ...er 12 12 31 F 12 56 3 Remove the 4 screws 1 F 12 57 4 Slide out the fixing unit 1 toward the front F 12 58 C Cleaning the Film Bias Static Eliminator 1 Remove the 2 screws 1 and detach the grounding plate 2 ...

Page 608: ...und on the back of the grounding plate Be sure to remove the cake of toner that may have collected on the static eliminator F 12 60 3 Fix the grounding plate 2 in place using 2 screws 1 F 12 61 D Mounting the Fixing Assembly 1 Fit the fixing unit 1 to the machine frame 1 ...

Page 609: ...Chapter 12 12 33 F 12 62 2 Secure the fixing assembly in place using 4 screws 1 F 12 63 3 Connect the 3 connectors 1 F 12 64 4 Mount the harness cover 2 using a screw 1 ...

Page 610: ...ound at the bottom of the right door against the protrusion 2 Engage the hinge 2 found at the top of the right door on the hook on the machine side plate F 12 66 3 Fix the mounting base 1 in place using 2 screws 3 4 Connect the connector 4 and fit the reuse band 5 in place ...

Page 611: ...Chapter 12 12 35 F 12 67 5 Mount the right cover rear using 5 screws Take care not to trap the harness 1 by the cut off 2 of the right cover re F 12 68 6 Close the right door ...

Page 612: ......

Page 613: ...Chapter 13 Standards and Adjustments ...

Page 614: ......

Page 615: ...on System 13 15 13 4 1 After Replacing the Developing Unit 13 15 13 4 2 After Replacing the Drum Unit APVC correction 13 15 13 5 Electrical Components 13 16 13 5 1 After Replacing the HDD 13 16 13 5 2 After Replacing the DC Controller PCB 13 16 13 5 3 After Replacing the Main Controller PCB 13 17 13 5 4 After Replacing the Reader Controller PCB 13 18 13 6 Pickup Feeding System 13 21 13 6 1 Adjusti...

Page 616: ......

Page 617: ...ition as follows 1 Adjusting the Leading Edge Image Margin 1st side Adjust the registration in service mode COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ REGIST F 13 5 2 Adjusting the Left Right Image 1st side Mechanical Horizontal Registration Adjustment 3 Adjusting the Leading Edge Image Margin 2nd side Adjust the registration in service mode 2 5 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 0 2 5 1 5mm 2nd side of double sided copy 2 5 2 ...

Page 618: ...se the margin by 1 mm 2 5 4 6 8 1012141618 20 0 2nd side of double sided copy 2 5 2 0mm Image left edge Increase the ADFJ REFE value an increase of 10 will increase the non image width by 1 mm Decrease the AD J REFE setting a decrease of 10 will decrease the non image width by 1 mm 10 8 6 5 4 2 0 2nd side of small size double sided copy 2 5 2 0mm Paper left edge Increase the ADJ RE L setting an in...

Page 619: ...margin 1st side 4 Remove the 2 claws 2 and detach the grip right front 1 F 13 13 5 Loosen the fixing screw 2 on the horizontal registration adjusting plate 1 of the cassette 6 While referring to the index you checked in step 3 move the horizontal registration adjusting plate back and forth Moving the plate toward the rear of the machine will increase the left right image margin along the image fro...

Page 620: ...o make sure that the margin is as indicated 9 Mount the right front cover of the machine B Adjusting the Left Right Image Margin 2nd side B 1 2nd Side of Small Size Paper left right image margin 1 If the margin is not as indicated change the setting of the 2nd side left right image margin of the cassette 1 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE An increase of 1 will decrease the left right image margin a...

Page 621: ...l feed d tray F 13 18 5 So that the margin is as indicated move the top cover of the manual feed tray back and forth Moving the top cover of the manual feed tray toward the rear of the machine will decrease the left right image margin along the front side 6 Tighten fixing screw on the top cover of the manual feed tray 7 Put paper in the manual feed tray 8 Make a copy using the manual feed tray as ...

Page 622: ...mage Margin 1s side mechanical adjustment 1 Make a copy using the paper deck as the source of paper and check to make sure that the left right image margin in the image front direction is 2 5 1 5 mm If not as indicated go through the following 2 Slide out the compartment 3 Turn the 2 screws 2 to adjust the mounting position of the latch plate 1 of the deck open solenoid SL2D found at the left rear...

Page 623: ...ader controller and download it after initializing the RAM so that you need not perform the following 1 Reader Unit Related Adjustments 1 Using the SST download the latest system software R CON 2 Make the following selections in service mode COPIER FUNCTION LEARN R CON Then press the OK key to initialize the RAM thereafter turn off and then on the main power 3 Enter the following values in service...

Page 624: ...p position adjustment FEEDER ADJSUT DOCST c original feed speed magnification adjustment FEEDER ADUST LA SPEED 2 Make adjustments using the following service mode items a Tray Width Adjustment FEEDER FUNCTION TRY A4 FEEDER FUNCTION TRY A5R FEEDER FUNCTION TRY LTR FEEDER FUNCTION TRY LTRR b CIS Read Position Adjustment for stream reading COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STRD POS c White Level Adjustment COP...

Page 625: ... Exposure System 13 3 1 After Replacing the Laser Scanner Unit 0007 5178 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Enter the values recorded on the label on the laser scanner unit for the following in service mode COPIER ADJUST LASER LA DELAY ...

Page 626: ...isappear when 3 or so copies are made 13 4 2 After Replacing the Drum Unit APVC correction 0007 5181 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Connect the power plug to the power outlet and turn on the main power unit 2 In the host machine s service mode make the following selections COPIER FUNCTION DPC D GAMMA 3 Press the OK key The machine will pick up paper from cassette 1 regardless of the size of the pap...

Page 627: ...TION MISC P P PRINT 1 Using the SST download the latest system software 2 Using the following service mode item initialize the memory of the DC controller PCB COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR DC CON 3 Using the following service mode items enter the values indicated on the P PRINT page COPIER ADJUST LASER LA DELAY LA OFF POWER COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP DE OFST COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK T BLANK B COPIER ADJUST HV...

Page 628: ...r 3 sec or more and turn it back on Unless you have registered system control group ID and system control ID No you will not be able to register cards for the device in the course of Net Spot Accountant setup work 12 Download the card ID Keep the machine in a standby state and download the card ID to be used from the NSA 13 Check the count control particulars in user mode system control setup grou...

Page 629: ... related adjustments 1 Enter the following values by referring to the values indicated on the P PRINT page you have previously printed out a main scanning direction position adjustment for stream reading COPIER ADJSUT ADJ XY ADJ Y DF b original stop position adjustment FEEDER ADJSUT DOCST c original feed speed magnification adjustment FEEDER ADUST LA SPEED 2 Make adjustments using the following se...

Page 630: ... If the value is not as indicated for the cassette 1 or 2 make the following adjustments F 13 25 2 If a 2 Cassette Pedestal Y2 is installed open the right door 1 of the pedestal 3 Open the lower right cover 2 then remove the 2 screws 3 and detach the cover lower front 4 F 13 26 4 Take out the cassette 1 or 2 5 Check the index 1 of the adjusting plate F 13 27 Adjusting the Cassette 1 6 Remove the 2...

Page 631: ...e 7 While referring to the index you checked in step 5 move the adjusting plate back and forth Moving the adjusting plate toward the rear of the machine will increase the margin along the image front F 13 30 8 Tighten the fixing screw 9 Put the cassette 2 back in place 10 Make a copy using the cassette 2 as the source of paper and check to make sure that the margin in the image front direction is ...

Page 632: ...sided small and large size copies and check to make sure that the front margin is 2 5 2 0 mm A sheet is large size if its length in feed direction is longer than A4 LTR F 13 33 2 If the value is not as indicated change the adjustment value of the 2nd side horizontal registration for small large size COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ REFE small size COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ RE L large size An increases ...

Page 633: ...stering the Paper Width Basic Value 0007 4926 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 1 Turn on the main power switch 2 Register the paper width basic value for A4R as follows 2 1 Match the manual feed side guide 1 against the A4R marking F 13 36 2 2 Start service mode and select register manual feed d A4R width CPOIER FUNCTION CST MF A4R 2 3 Press the OK key to save the new A4R width 3 Register the paper wid...

Page 634: ...t down sequence shown on the control panel so that the main power switch may be turned off 8 Turn off the main power switch 9 Wait for 3 sec or more then turn the main power switch back on 10 Print out the latest P ROINT page in service mode 11 Put the printed P PRINT page 1 in the service book case and dispose of the previous printout F 13 37 ...

Page 635: ...Chapter 14 Correcting Faulty Images ...

Page 636: ......

Page 637: ...ftone images Foreign 14 7 14 2 1 2 3 Horizontal Line Blurring at Intervals of 94 to 95 mm 14 8 14 2 1 2 4 White Lines in Sub Scanning Direction 14 9 14 2 1 3 Smudged Streaked 14 11 14 2 1 3 1 Stray Toner Along Fine Lines 14 11 14 2 1 3 2 Soiled Image Leading Edge 14 12 14 2 1 3 3 Black Dots 14 14 14 2 1 4 Ghost Memory 14 15 14 2 1 4 1 Ghost 14 15 14 2 2 Malfunction 14 16 14 2 2 1 No Power 14 16 14...

Page 638: ...le Resistors VR Light Emitting Diodes LED and Check Pins by 14 35 14 3 8 1 Variable Resistors VR Light Emitting Diodes and Check Pins by PCB 14 35 14 3 8 2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker 14 36 14 3 8 3 All Night Power Supply PCB 14 36 ...

Page 639: ...f power that can be used by the machine at all times 14 1 2 Checking the Paper 0007 9384 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 a Be sure the paper being used is of a type recommended by Canon b Be sure that the paper is not moist Try using paper fresh out of package 14 1 3 Checking the Placement of Paper 0007 9385 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 a There must be paper in the cassette or the tray deposited within...

Page 640: ...gn matter Check to make sure that there is no buildup of paper around the pickup feed and separation rollers See that they are free of wear scratches dirt and deformation Check to make sure that the paper is free of a bent leading edge and is free of curling waving and excess moisture Try using paper and transparency of a type recommended by Canon to see if the problem is corrected Mechanical Chec...

Page 641: ...see that the power and signal cables are correctly routed Check to see that the operation of the cover switch is normal Check to see that none of the fuses on the PCBs have an open circuit Check to see that the user has a correct understanding of how to use the machine and is using it correctly 14 1 7 Others 0007 9389 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 If a machine is brought from a cold to warm room its...

Page 642: ...op thus stopping the operation without removing charges from the surface of the photosensitive drum If the machine is left alone for a long time with the surface potential of its photosensitive drum uneven potential memory tends to occur within a layer of the photosensitive drum ultimately resulting in uneven density in sub scanning direction Field Remedy To rid the surface of the photosensitive d...

Page 643: ...or 0007 9967 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Symptom Uneven density at specific intervals tends to occur in sub scanning direction from leading edge to trailing edge in relation to paper movement when the main motor starts to rotate irregularly iR2270 2870 intervals of about 3 5 mm ...

Page 644: ...eveloping Assembly 0008 3408 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Inspected by Canon Inc Description As a result of inspection it was found this symptom occurred because the laser light was intercepted by dust on the top cover of the developing assembly If the symptom occurs remove the developing assembly and clean its top cover referring to the Service Manual Maintenance and Inspection Cleaning Cleaning t...

Page 645: ... Description As a result of inspection it was found this symptom occurred because foreign substances on the edge of the feed guide of the developing assembly came into contact with the surface of the drum If the symptom occurs clean the feed guide referring to the Service Manual Maintenance and Inspection Cleaning Cleaning the Developing Assembly Spacer Feed Guide Dust Blocking Glass and Fixing In...

Page 646: ...ange causing uneven rotation and thus blurring This problem tends to occur during the initial period of use less than 10K when the coefficient of friction is relatively even or when a halftone image is generated after leaving the machine alone for 1 to 2 days This problem on the other hand tends to disappear when about 10 printouts are made This problem can also occur when the drum unit is taken o...

Page 647: ...sing the friction Field Remedy Make about 10 copies of the Test Chart Image Sample F 14 4 14 2 1 2 4 White Lines in Sub Scanning Direction 0007 7465 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Cause The presence of foreign matter inside the developing assembly can make its way to the developing cylinder ...

Page 648: ...eplacing the fixing assembly and work with the developing assembly inside the machine the developing cylinder will remain exposed and become subjected to dust or other foreign matter For this reason it is important to remove the developing assembly as well as the drum unit when disassembling and assembling the image formation or fixing system This however does not apply if you are simply replacing...

Page 649: ...nse to the heat from the fixing assembly thus causing toner to fly astray This problem tends to occur when paper has low resistance and in a high temperature high humidity environment Field Remedy Use the following service mode item to decrease the developing bias thus suppressing the symptom COPIER OPTION BODY FIX SMR 0 default 1 decrease the developing bias by a single step 20 V 2 decrease the d...

Page 650: ...sitive surface comes close to or into contact with the toner coated surface of paper the toner layer can become shifted toward the trailing edge of the paper This problem tends to be conspicuous when the toner layer is relatively high against the width of lines about 0 2 to 0 6 mm and in addition when the lines are at a right angle to the feed direction axial direction of the photosensitive drum ...

Page 651: ...rease the developing bias thus suppressing the symptom COPIER OPTION BODY FIX SMR 0 default 1 decrease the developing bias by a single step 20 V 2 decrease the developing bias by 2 steps 40 V If 2 is selected the lines can become thinner Image Sample F 14 7 ...

Page 652: ...ilm or the pressure roller to the face or back of paper Field Remedy Use the following service mode item to change the timing at which the fixing pressure roller is cleaned COPIER OPTION BODY FIX CLN 0 disable cleaning default 1 execute cleaning during last rotation every 500 printouts 2 execute cleaning during last rotation every 200 printouts 3 execute cleaning during last rotation every 100 pri...

Page 653: ...ry 14 2 1 4 1 Ghost 0007 7096 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Cause This problem tends to occur when there are both residual toner and fresh toner on the developing cylinder and thus difference in charge between these two kinds of toner Field Remedy ...

Page 654: ... Image Sample F 14 9 14 2 2 Malfunction 14 2 2 1 No Power 14 2 2 1 1 Upon installation machine does not start up LCD does not come on although main power indicator on control panel lights up Poor connection of ROM RAM 0008 3477 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 ...

Page 655: ...OM or the RAM 14 2 2 2 Noise 14 2 2 2 1 Noise at Time of Pickup from the Cassette 0007 7052 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Cause When double feeding occurs at time of pickup the contact between the sheets and the feed roller and the separation roller cause the separation roller assembly to vibrate Field Remedy Replace the roller with a sponge retard roller FB5 0873 to be used as needed cassette only ...

Page 656: ...ckup roller CL2 registration clutch drives the registration roller CL3 developing sleeve clutch drives the developing sleeve CL6 duplex feed clutch drives the duplex roller 1 2 iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F SL1 cassette 1 pickup solenoid drives the cassette 1 pickup roller SL2 cassette 2 pickup solenoid drives the cassette 2 pickup roller Notatio n Parts No PART CHK DC controller PCB CL1 FH6 5076 CL 1 J...

Page 657: ...0 iR4570 Reader Unit T 14 3 T 14 4 SL1 FK2 0408 SL 1 J308 SL2 FK2 0408 SL 2 J318 Notation Name Description M501 reader motor drives the carriage Notati on Parts No Reader controller PCB Error M501 FH5 1028 J505 E202 Notatio n Parts No PART CHK DC controller PCB CL1 CL2 CL6 SL1 SL2 CL3 ...

Page 658: ...ter unit M3 fixing motor drives the fixing assembly M4 delivery motor 1 drives the delivery roller M5 bottle rotation motor drives the rotation of the bottle M6 cassette 1 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 1 M7 cassette 2 pickup motor drives the pickup unit 2 M10 duplex feed motor drives the duplex roller 1 2 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F M12 hopper motor drives the hopper M501 ...

Page 659: ...334 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F MTR 1 J316 E110 M2 FK2 0385 iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0362 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F MTR 2 J312 E010 M3 FK2 0367 MTR 3 J311 J319 E014 M4 FK2 0365 MTR 4 J305 M5 FK2 0015 MTR 5 J302A E025 M6 FK2 0377 MTR 6 J307A M7 FK2 0377 MTR 7 J307A M10 FL2 3266 MTR 8 306 M12 FK2 0379 MTR 9 J302A E025 ...

Page 660: ...Chapter 14 14 22 F 14 12 14 3 3 Fan 14 3 3 1 Fans 0007 6836 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a fan Printer Unit M4 M1 M12 M3 M2 M6 M7 M5 M10 ...

Page 661: ...iR4570 Reader Unit Notatio n Name Description FM1 heat discharge fan front discharges heat from the fixing unit FM2 heat discharge fan rear discharges heat from the fixing unit Notati on Parts No I O DC controller PCB Error FM1 FK2 0360 P020 6 1 ON J307B E805 FM2 FK2 0360 P023 2 1 ON J307B E805 FM1 FM2 ...

Page 662: ...detects original size for all countries PS507 original sensor 4 detects original size AB Inch AB PS508 original sensor 5 detects original size Inch A CIS1 CIS reads originals Notatio n Parts No I O Reader controller PCB Jam error code PS501 WG8 5624 P006 7 1 copyboard cover closed J506 PS502 WG8 5624 P006 5 1 copyboard cover closed J506 0090 0091 PS503 WG8 5624 P006 6 1 HP J506 E202 PS504 FH7 7569...

Page 663: ...paper level B in cassette 2 PS7 manual feeder paper sensor detects paper in the manual feeder PS8 fixing film speed sensor detects the speed of the fixing film PS9 pre registration sensor detects paper before registration PS10 cassette 1 retry sensor detects pickup retry in cassette 1 PS11 cassette 2 retry sensor detects pickup retry in cassettes 2 PS13 fixing outlet sensor detects paper at the fi...

Page 664: ... the drum TP1 thermal switch cuts off the power to the heater in response to overheating Notatio n Parts No I O DC controller PCB JAM PS1 FH7 7312 P028 5 1 paper absent J308 PS2 FH7 7312 P019 5 1 paper absent J318 PS3 FH7 7312 P028 6 1 level about 50 or less J308 PS4 FH7 7312 P028 7 1 level about 50 sheets or less J308 PS5 FH7 7312 P019 6 1 level about 50 or less J318 PS6 FH7 7312 P019 7 1 level a...

Page 665: ...2 0149 J302B HU1 FK2 0160 J302A TS1 FK2 0358 J302B TS2 FK2 0358 J302A Notation Parts No DC controller PCB AC driver PCB TH1 TH 2 fixing film unit iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0293 100V FM2 0358 120V FM2 0359 230V iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F FM2 1792 100V FM2 1793 120V FM2 1794 230V J304 TP1 J202 TH3 FM2 2776 J302A Notatio n Parts No I O DC controller PCB JAM ...

Page 666: ...witch 14 3 5 1 Switches 0007 6838 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Reader Unit The reader unit does not have a switch Printer Unit PS15 PS14 PS17 PS7 PS9 HU1 PS16 PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 PS10 PS11 PS18 TS1 TS2 PS13 PS8 TH1 TH2 TP1 TH3 PS22 ...

Page 667: ... iR3570 iR4570 Reader Unit Notation Name Description SW1 main power switch turns on off the main power switch SW2 door switch checks the right door SW5 environment heater switch turns on off the environment heater option Notatio n Parts No DC controller PCB AC driver PCB SW1 FK2 0140 J201 SW2 FK2 0384 J309 SW5 WC1 5182 SW1 SW5 SW2 ...

Page 668: ... on the copyboard glass LCD1 LCD panel FL2 1092 display on the control panel touch panel Notation Name Description H1 fixing main heater fixing main heater H2 fixing sub heater fixing sub heater H4 cassette heater prevents absorption of moisture by the paper inside the cassette H7 deck heater prevents absorption of moisture by paper inside the side deck ELCB1 leakage breaker 100V leakage breaker H...

Page 669: ...manual feeder SP1 speaker speaker fax unit Notation Parts No H1 H2 fixing film unit iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0293 100V FM2 0358 120V FM2 0359 230V fixing film unit iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F FM2 1792 100V FM2 1793 120V FM2 1794 230V H4 FK2 0375 100V FK2 0376 230V H7 NPN 100V FH7 4585 230V ELCB1 FH7 7626 ELCB2 FH7 7625 Notatio n Parts No Main controller PCB DC controller PCB LA1 FK2 0368 J302B VA1 ...

Page 670: ...controller PCB FG3 3765 controls the reader unit ADF 2 control panel CPU PCB FG6 8938 controls the control panel 3 control pen key PCB FG3 2834 controls the inputs from the keypad keys 4 control panel inverter PCB FG6 8939 controls the activation of the backlight of the LCD Notatio n Parts No Main controller PCB DC controller PCB HDD1 H1 H2 LA1 VA1 SVR1 ELCB1 ELCB2 H4 SP1 H7 ...

Page 671: ...pseudo CI PCB FM2 2773 generates the pseudo CI signal 6 BD PCB scanner unit FM2 0276 iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0334 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F generates the BD signal 7 NCU PCB FM2 2790 controls the line switching operation 9 fax board PCB FM2 2789 control the fax unit 10 laser driver PCB scanner unit FM2 0276 iR2270 2270F 2870 2870F FM2 0334 iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F controls the laser unit drive 11...

Page 672: ... 17 accessories power supply PCB FK2 0339 accessorizes power supply 18 environment switch PCB FG3 2797 heater power supply switch 19 DC controller PCB FM2 2767 controls the printer unit accessory 20 main controller PCB FM2 3226 processes output image data for the printer unit 21 expansion bus PCB FM2 2804 connection interface 22 USB board FM2 3010 USB interface 23 all night power supply PCB FK2 03...

Page 673: ...e Resistors VR Light Emitting Diodes and Check Pins by PCB 0007 6841 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Of the variable resistors VR light emitting diodes LED and check pins found in the machine those that are needed when servicing the machine in the field are discussed 2 3 4 12 14 16 23 18 13 19 20 6 10 15 17 21 22 11 9 7 5 ...

Page 674: ... not be used in the field 14 3 8 2 Points to Note About the Leakage Breaker 0007 7795 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 Points to Note When Checking the Output of a PCB Normally an AC voltage is applied to the terminal of the leakage breaker 1 Take care not to touch it when making a check F 14 21 14 3 8 3 All Night Power Supply PCB 0007 6843 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 F 14 22 J691 J692 J601 J693 VR201 ...

Page 675: ...T 14 22 Notation Description VR201 for factory use ...

Page 676: ......

Page 677: ...Chapter 15 Self Diagnosis ...

Page 678: ......

Page 679: ...esults of Self Diagnosis 15 33 15 3 2 Error Codes 15 35 15 4 Jam Code 15 44 15 4 1 Jam Cover printer unit 15 44 15 4 2 Jam Code finisher related 15 45 15 4 3 Jam Code ADF related 15 46 15 5 Alarm Code 15 49 15 5 1 Alarm Code 15 49 15 6 Finisher Saddle Finisher Error Codes 15 50 15 6 1 Error Code in Detail finisher puncher 15 50 15 7 DADF Error Codes 15 76 15 7 1 Error Code in Detail DF 15 76 ...

Page 680: ......

Page 681: ...full waste toner case full sensor error E020 toner clogging between sub hopper and developing assembly E024 developing assembly connector disconnection E025 hopper motor bottle motor error E032 NE controller counter error E064 power supply voltage error high voltage E100 BD interval error E110 scanner motor error E191 communication error for high voltage power supply E202 CIS home position detecti...

Page 682: ...ray ascent error upper tray ascent error E542 lower tray ascent error E577 paddle error E584 shutter error E590 punching error E591 puncher dust sensor error E592 punch horizontal registration sensor error E593 punch shift error E5F0 saddle paper positioning error E5F1 saddle paper folding error E5F2 saddle guide error E5F3 saddle alignment error E5F4 saddle rear stapling error E5F5 saddle front s...

Page 683: ...munication error for pedestal E717 communication error for NE controller E719 coin vendor error E730 PDL software error E732 scanner communication error E733 printer communication error E740 Ether board error E743 DDI communication error E744 language file boot ROM error E745 TokenRing board error E746 accessories board wrong model error E748 controller board and SDRAM size mismatch E805 fan error...

Page 684: ...he reading of the main thermistor is less than 120 deg C continuously for 200 msec 6 sec after the start of power supply The startup control does not end 30 sec after the start of power supply Reset the condition in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Replace the main thermistor Replace the DC controller PCB E001 The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high 0000 The reading of the ...

Page 685: ...roller PCB E003 The fixing temperature is too low after a standby state 0000 While regular temperature control is under way the reading of the main thermistor is less than 140 deg C continuously for 400 msec or more Reset the condition in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Replace the main thermistor Replace the DC controller PCB E007 The rotation of the fixing film is faulty 0000 While the fi...

Page 686: ...s continuously an alert is issued thereafter the case is identified as being full continuously for 100 prints Replace the waste toner sensor Replace the DC controller PCB E020 The path between the sub hopper and the developing assembly is clogged with toner 0000 The developing assembly toner sensor detects the absence of toner while the sub hopper toner sensor detects the presence of toner With th...

Page 687: ...r the count pulse signal Turn off the main power and check the cable for an open circuit then turn the main power back on E064 The voltage of the power supply is faulty high voltage error 0001 The value read from the EEPORM is outside a specific range Turn off and then back on the main power Replace the EEPROM 0002 While output is being generated the AD value of the primary DC voltage is 230 DEC o...

Page 688: ...error has occurred 50 times or more BD error Replace the laser unit Replace the DC controller PCB Check the wiring E110 The scanner motor is faulty 0001 The scanner motor speed lock signal does not indicate a locked state a specific period of time after the scanner motor has been started Replace the laser unit Replace the DC controller PCB Check the wiring 0002 The speed lock signal indicates a de...

Page 689: ... position sensor scanner motor reader controller PCB E225 The light intensity of the CIS is faulty 0001 During shading operation the intensity is below a specific level Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable Replace the following as necessary flexible cable CIS reader controller PCB 0002 During DF stream reading the sheet to sheet light intensity is faulty Disconnect and then connect the f...

Page 690: ...rred at power on Replace the reader controller PCB 0002 An error has occurred during a write operation Replace the reader controller PCB 0003 An error has occurred during a read operation following a write operation Replace the reader controller PCB E261 The zero cross signal is faulty 0000 When the relay is on the zero cross signal is not detected for 500 msec or more Replace the AC driver PCB Re...

Page 691: ...e There is no startup file The program for the main CPU does not exist on the HDD or in BOOTDEV BOOT and so on Detection while boot ROM is in use at time of system file loading usrIde Timing of Detection once at startup See the details under 602 0003 Cause An HD write abort error has occurred The sectors for BOOTDEV on the HD cannot be read Detection BARSAC all at time of bootable startup Timing o...

Page 692: ...m that are called in Timing of Detection once at bootable startup See the details under 602 01X X DOSDEV is faulty See the details under 602 02X X FSTDEV is faulty See the details under 602 03X X DOSDEV2 is faulty See the details under 602 04X X FSTPDEV is faulty See the details under 602 05X X DOSDEV3 is faulty See the details under 602 06X X PDLDEV is faulty See the details under 602 07X X DOSDE...

Page 693: ...y The battery has become exhausted leading to loss of SRAM contents Try step 1 if it fails try step 2 1 Turn off and then back on the power switch to generate the key once again 2 If the same error still continues replace the board on which the SRAM is mounted Keep in mind that doing so will lead to loss of all user data E674 An error has occurred in communication between the fax control PCB 2 lin...

Page 694: ...pted Check the cable Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E716 There is an error in the communication with the pedestal 0000 After the presence of a pedestal has been detected the communication fails to be normal for 5 sec Check the cable Replace the DC controller PCB Replace the pedestal drive PCB E717 There is an error in the communication with the NE controller 0001...

Page 695: ...e the unit price is being checked at startup an error occurs in the communication with the coin vendor Check the cable thereafter reset the condition in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR 0011 An error has occurred at new card reader startup The new card reader is not connected when the power is turned off although it was connected when the power was turned off Check the cable thereafter reset...

Page 696: ...cute PDL resetting 2 Turn on the power once again 3 Check the connection of the SURF board 4 Re install the firmware 5 Replace the main board A007 There is a mismatch between the control software of the machine and the PDL control software in regard to version 1 Execute PDL resetting 2 Turn on the power once again 3 Execute system formatting all and reinstall the system B013 There is corruption in...

Page 697: ...curred An SEQ timeout error has occurred Disconnect and then connect the flexible cable used to connect the reader unit and the printer unit Replace the following as necessary flexible cable reader controller PCB main controller PCB E744 There is an error in the language file boot ROM 0001 The version of the language file on the HDD and that of the bootable do not match Download a language file of...

Page 698: ...on error 1 Check the connection of the cable 2 Replace the cable 3 Check the power source of the MAU 4 Replace the MAU 5 Replace the TokenRing board 0005 Other Errors E746 The accessories board is of the wrong type 0003 At startup a board for a different model has been detected Replace the UFR board of the correct type model E748 There is a mismatch between controller board and SDRAM size 1001 The...

Page 699: ...plied 3 If the symptom still exists after the foregoing replace the HDD re install the system software If the symptom still exists replace the main board 0 0 0 2 The system software for the main CPU does not exist 1 Start up in safe mode and format the HDD using the SST all then re initial the system software System Language RUI then turn off and then back on the main power switch 2 If the symptom...

Page 700: ...d 1 1 Set CHK TYPE 0 and execute HD CHECK 50 to 50 min thereafter turn off and then back on the main power switch 2 If the symptom still exists after the foregoing start up in safe mode then format the HDD full using the SST and re install the system software System Language RUI and turn off and then back on the main power switch 3 If the symptom still exists after the foregoing suspect a fault on...

Page 701: ...HDD and replace the HDD and re install the system software XX YY X X CHK TYP E Partiti on in questio n Descripti on 01 02 03 11 21 13 25 10 12 14 22 23 24 At startup During routine operation Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy 1 1 DOSD EV General data storage area 1 5 9 10 11 12 2 1 FSTDE V Image data storage area e g Box 1 5 9 10 11 12 3 1 DOSD EV2 Image thumbnail display data area e ...

Page 702: ...le color correction info file for PDL function 1 5 9 10 11 12 7 4 DOSD EV4 Firmware storage area address book filter 2 6 9 10 11 12 8 4 BOOT DEV Firmware storage area System Language RUI 3 8 9 10 11 12 XX YY X X CHK TYP E Partiti on in questio n Descripti on 01 02 03 11 21 13 25 10 12 14 22 23 24 At startup During routine operation Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy Reme dy ...

Page 703: ... HDD formatting with SST 1 1 DOSDE V General data storage area Entire collection of image data e g Box Possible 4 partitions simul taneously FSTDEV specified 4 partitions simul taneously Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system softwaremust be downloaded XX YY X X CHK TYP E Partiti on in questio n Descripti on 01 0...

Page 704: ...downloaded 3 1 DOSDE V2 Image thumbnail display data area e g Box Entire collection of image data e g Box Possible 4 partitions simul taneously FSTDEV specified 4 partitions simul taneously Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system software must be downloaded X X CHK TYP E Partition in question Descriptio n Typical ...

Page 705: ...remust be downloaded 5 2 DOSDE V3 General file storage area user settings logs PDL spool image data control info Items that are relatively less critical Possible DOSDEV 3 specified Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system softwaremust be downloaded X X CHK TYP E Partition in question Descriptio n Typical item delet...

Page 706: ...ormatting the system software must be downloaded 7 4 DOSDE V4 Firmware storage area address book filter Address book Not possible DOSDEV 4 specified Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system software must be downloaded X X CHK TYP E Partition in question Descriptio n Typical item deleted HDD formattin g by HD CLEAR ...

Page 707: ...etion of all data After formatting the system softwaremust be downloaded 9 5 DOSDE V5 For future expansion None in particular Possible DOSDEV 5 specified Possible however selection of a specific partition is not allowed requiring deletion of all data After formatting the system softwaremust be downloaded F F 0 Not identified Entire HDD check on faulty sector and recovery X X CHK TYP E Partition in...

Page 708: ... the SST and re install the system software System Language RUI Thereafter turn off and then back on the main power 3 01 The ongoing write operation has been suspended at startup To run a recovery session for the boot partition you will have to use safe mode in combination with the SST 1 Set 0 for TYPE TYPE and execute HDD CHECK 40 to 50 min Thereafter turn off and the back on the power 2 If the s...

Page 709: ...ently i e you will not the able to execute HDD CLEAR from service mode 1 If possible ask the user to back up the address book data using the RUI 2 From service mode start download mode then execute full formatting using the SST and re install the system software System Language RUI Thereafter turn off and the back on the main power 7 02 A file system error has occurred This type of error is highly...

Page 710: ... Works system error has occurred 1 Check the cable and power supply connectors 2 If the symptom still exits after the foregoing start up in safe mode and execute full formatting using the SST and re install the system software System Language RUI Thereafter turn off and then back on the main power 3 If the symptom still exits after the foregoing suspect a fault on the HDD and replace the HDD and r...

Page 711: ...he ongoing write operation has been suspended There is a likelihood of the presence of damage to the file data on the HDD e g Box 1 Set 0 for TYPE TYPE and execute HDD CHECK 40 to 50 min Thereafter turn off and then back on the power 2 If the symptom still exits after the foregoing set 1 for TYPE TYPE and execute HDD CLEAR In the case of DOSDEV4 or BOOTDEV execute formatting and re installation on...

Page 712: ...te suspended sector happens to be a critical sector that holds a control area there is no way of repairing it you will have to execute HDD formatting Replacing the HDD 1 Turn off the main switch 2 Connect the new HDD 3 Start up the machine in safe mode 4 Connect the SST and execute full formatting 5 Using the SST download the system software System Language RUI 6 Turn off and then back on the powe...

Page 713: ... try again If browsing is still not permitted select a different server NetWare is in use Try again later NetWare is printing using PSeve or NDSPServer not permitting browsing Wait until NetWare finishes printing then try again The layer in question at the target is too deep to browse The number of characters is in excess of the number allowed The layer in question cannot be specified Specify a di...

Page 714: ...sword or the settings If the login information of the LDAP server is set to use or use security authentication the user name or the password is wrong In user mode check the LDAP server settings user name password If the login information of the LDAP server is set to use security authentication the domain name is wrong In user mode check the LDAP server settings domain name A timeout condition has ...

Page 715: ...r mode the LDAP server settings server LDAP version and character code is set for version 3 however the LDAP server is operating for version 2 In user mode set the LDAP server settings so that the LDAP server version and the character code are both version 2 Cause Remedy 001 There is a paper or original jam Remove the jammed paper or original 003 A communication lasting longer than a specific peri...

Page 716: ...s of the group address selected as the forwarding target may have been deleted or there is no more than a user box thus causing the transmission to fail Try transmitting once again The attempt to transmit to an address registered in the address book has failed because the address has been removed from the address table while in wait for transmission Try once again 037 There is a shortage of memory...

Page 717: ...off and then back on the main power 704 An error has occurred while an attempt is made to obtain address information from the address book Check the settings of the address and try once again if the operation is still not normal try turning off and then back on the main power 705 The image data size is in excess of the upper limit imposed on transmission data size set in user mode thus causing sus...

Page 718: ...onnection of the network 753 A TCP IP error has occurred in the course of e mail transmission e g socket select error Check the condition of the network cable and the connector If the operation does not return to normal try turning off and then back on the main power of the machine 754 The server has not been started up for transmission or the network is disconnected Or the target settings are wro...

Page 719: ...is prohibited Change the setting of the file server so that overwriting may be permitted In relation to transmission file server the folder name or the password that has been specified is wrong Check the address setting 802 In the system control setup user mode the settings of the SMTP server for e mail i fax are wrong The setting of the DNS server is wrong The attempt to connect to the DNS server...

Page 720: ...le server is being printed you will not be able to log in to the server in question Wait a while and then try once again Or change the NetWare server settings of the target or stop PServer 818 The data that has been received is in a format that does not permit printing Ask the source to change the file format and transmit it once again 819 The data that has been received is of a type that cannot b...

Page 721: ...s lower than the size permitted by the mail server 3 Check the condition of the mail server DNS server and network 831 An attempt to receive i fax in SMTP has failed because of the reception printing range settings made as part of the IP address range setting in user mode Change the reception printing range settings made as part of the IP address range setting in user mode 832 In user mode the e m...

Page 722: ...tings user mode 841 In relation to an attempt for transmission for e mail i fax there is no coding algorithm that may be used in common with the mail server 1 Set SSL to OFF as part of the network settings under system control settings user mode 2 Add a coding algorithm that may be used in common mail server settings 842 In relation to an attempt for transmission of e mail i fax a request has been...

Page 723: ...f while a job is being executed causing an error Check to see that the main power switch is on as necessary try once again 899 The transmission of e mail or i fax has ended However the transmission has gone through multiple servers and there is no way of finding out whether the transmission has reached the target 1 Check with the target to see if the transmission has arrived 2 Check to see if an e...

Page 724: ...y sensor PS2 cassette pedestall xx05 registration sensor PS9 xx06 xx07 fixing delivery sensor PS13 xx08 No 1 delivery sensor PS14 xx09 No 2 delivery sensor PS1A 2 3 delivery unit xx0A reversal sensor PS4A 2 3 delivery unit xx0B No 3 delivery sensor PS5A 2 3 delivery unit xx0C duplexing assembly feed sensor PS3A 2 3 delivery unit xx0D duplex feed sensor PS17 xx0E deck retry sensor PS6D side paper d...

Page 725: ...04 delivery path sensor feed stationary jam PI4 1200 timing jam PI3 1500 stapler jam STP 1300 power on jam PI3 PI4 1400 door open jam DOOR 1644 punch jam LED5 PTR5 1645 punch power on jam LED5 PTR5 1791 saddle feed sensor feed delay jam PI8S PI19S PI20S 1792 saddle delivery sensor feed delay jam PI11S 1793 saddle inlet sensor feed delay jam PI22S 17A1 saddle feed sensor feed stationary jam P18S PI...

Page 726: ... registration sensor delay PI2 The registration sensor does not detect paper with 1 5 sec after pickup At time of reversal the registration sensor does not detect paper even after the read motor has rotated for a specific period of time 0004 registration sensor stationary PI2 After the registration sensor has gone on it does not go off even when the paper has been moved for 500 mm 700 mm if in ext...

Page 727: ...ead sensor stationary PI3 The 1st original has been identified as a read sensor stationary jam 0047 1st sheet delivery sensor delay PI3 PI4 The 1st original has been identified as a delivery sensor delay jam 0048 1st sheet delivery sensor stationary PI4 The 1st original has been identified as a delivery sensor stationary jam 0071 timing error TIMING NG The software sequence fails to end normally w...

Page 728: ...I3 PI4 The presence of paper is detected inside the feeder when the 1st sheet is being picked up 0095 pickup fault PICKUP NG With no original in the tray the pickup signal is received for 2 sec Code Jam Sensor notation Description ...

Page 729: ...on of soiling of glass in stream reading mode 04 pickup feed system 0008 0011 0012 0013 0014 0018 optional deck lifter error 1st cassette retry alarm 2nd cassette retry alarm 3rd cassette retry alarm 4th cassette retry alarm optional deck retry alarm 61 finisher 0001 no staple 62 saddle stitcher 0001 no stitch staple 65 puncher 0001 punch waste case full ...

Page 730: ...addle unit Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the saddle controller PCB Check the cable 0003 fault in communicatio n between finisher and punch unit Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the punch drive PCB Check the cable E505 0001 fault in the backup memory of the finisher common among all finishers fault in the data stored in backup memory Turn off the main power Check the wiring...

Page 731: ...cer is shifted from home position the belt escape home position sensordoesnot go off within 1 5 sec E514 0001 fault in trailing edge assist motor Finisher Q3 Q4 The home positionsensor does not go off even when the trailing edge assist motor has rotated for a specific period of time Replace the finisher control PCB Replace the trailing edge assist motor 0002 The home positionsensor does not go on ...

Page 732: ...pecific period of time E530 8001 Rear alignment error Finisher S1 The home positionsensor does not go on within 2000 msec after the start of operation when the rear aligning plate is shifted to home position Replace the finisher controlled PCB Replace the rear alignment motor Check the rear aligning plate drive mechanism Check the rear alignment home position sensor 8002 The home positionsensor do...

Page 733: ...n sensor 0002 The home positionsensor does not go on even when the front alignment motor hasbeen rotated for a specific period of time E531 8001 Stapler error Finisher S1 At time of staple jam recovery the home position sensordoesnot go on with 500 msec after the start of reverse rotation of the stapler motor Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the stapler Check the harness 8002 The home p...

Page 734: ...otor has rotated for a specific period of time E532 8001 Stapler shift error Finisher S1 The stapler slide home positionsensor does not go on within 11 sec when the stapler is shifted to home position Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the stapler shift motor Check the stapler shift home position sensor Check the harness 8002 The stapler slide home positionsensor does not go off within 1 ...

Page 735: ...even when the stapler shift motor has rotated for a specific period of time E535 0001 Swing cam error Finisher S1 The home positionsensor does not go off within 1000 msec after the start of operation when the swing arm is shifted from home position Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the swing cam motor Check the swing cam home position sensor Check the harness 0002 The home positionsensor...

Page 736: ... swing motor has rotated for a specific period of time E537 8001 Front alignment error Finisher S1 The home positionsensor does not go on within 2 0 sec when the front aligning plate is moved to home position Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the front alignment motor Check the front aligning plate drive mechanism Check the front alignment home position sensor 8002 The home positionsenso...

Page 737: ...n the rear aligning plate is moved form home position E540 8002 Stack tray motor error Finisher S1 The operation to detect the paper surface of the stack tray does not end within 1 0 sec Replace the finisher controller PCB Replace the tray ascent descent motor Check the stack tray drive mechanism Check the paper surface sensor 8003 An abnormal combinationof sensor states has been detected Replace ...

Page 738: ...finisher controller PCB 0004 Safety switch activation Check the No 1 tray closed detecting switch Replace the finisher controller PCB E542 0002 Lower tray ascent descent motor error Finisher Q3 Q4 Lower tray ascent descent motor clock error Replace the No 2 tray shift motor Replace the finisher controller PCB Check the tray ascent descent mechanism 0003 Area error Replace the No 2 tray shift area ...

Page 739: ... home position sensordoesnot go off within 1 0 sec when the paddle is moved to home position E584 0001 Shutter unit error Finisher Q3 Q4 The shutter open sensor does not go off i e the shutter does not close Check the stack edging motor Check the open close clutch Check the shutter home position sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 The shutter open sensor does not go on i e the shutter ...

Page 740: ...nch driver PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 Error in light receiving voltage while light is not emitted E592 0001 Paper trailing edge sensor horizontal sensor error Error in light receiving voltage when light is emitted trailing edge sensor Check the paper trailing edge sensor Check the horizontal registration sensor Check the punch driver PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E592 0...

Page 741: ...ror in light receiving voltage when light is emitted horizontal registration sensor 2 Check the paper training edge sensor Check the horizontal registration sensor Check the punch driver PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E592 0006 Paper trailing edge sensor registration sensor error Error in light receiving voltage when light is not emitted horizontal registration sensor 2 Check the paper tr...

Page 742: ...the finisher controller PCB E592 000A Paper trailing edge sensor registration sensor error Error in light receiving voltage when light is not emitted horizontal registration sensor 4 Check the paper trailing edge sensor Check the horizontal registration sensor Check the punch drive PCB Replace the finisher controller PCB E593 0001 Punch shift motor error The light receiving voltage home positionse...

Page 743: ...nsor P17S Check the paper positioning plate motor Check the paper positioning plate home position sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Check the paper positioning plate drive mechanism 0002 The paper positioning plate home positionsensor doest not go off when the paper positioning platemotorhas been drivenfor 1 sec Paper positioning plate motor M4S paper positioning plate home positionsensor...

Page 744: ...sensor P14S Check the paper folding motor Check the paper folding motor clock sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Check the paper folding plate drive mechanism 0002 The state of the paper folding home position sensor doest not change whenthe paper folding motor has been driven for 3 sec Paper folding motor M2S paper folding motor clock sensor P14S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 745: ...uide home position sensor PI13S Check the guide motor Check the guide home position sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Check the guide drive mechanism 0002 The guide home position sensordoesnot go off when the guide motor hasbeen driven for 1 sec Guide motor M3S guide home position sensor PI13S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 746: ... aligning plate home position sensor PI5S Check the alignment motor Check the alignment home position sensor Check the aligning plate drive mechanism Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 The aligning plate home positionsensor does not go off when the alignment motorhasbeen driven for 1 sec Alignment motor M5S aligning plate home position sensor PI5S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 747: ...tor rear M6S stitching home positionsensor rear MS5S Replace the stitcher rear Check the harness Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 The stitching home position sensordoesnot go off when the stitch motor rear has been rotated in normal direction for 0 5 sec or more Stitch motor rear MS stitching home positionsensor rear MS5S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 748: ...r front M7S stitching home positionsensor front MS7S Replace the stitcher front Check the harness Replace the finisher controller PCB 0002 The stitching home position sensordoesnot go off when the switch motor front has been rotated in normal direction for 0 5 sec or more Stitch motor front M7S stitching home positionsensor front MS7S Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 749: ...n sensor PI14S Check the paper butting plate motor Check the paper butting plate home position sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB E5F6 0002 Saddle butting error The paper butting plate home position sensordoesnot go off when the paper butting plate motor hasbeen driven for 80 msec or more Paper butting plate motor M8S paper butting plate home position sensor PI14S Code Detail code Name Det...

Page 750: ...ng platemotorhas dropped below a specific value paper butting plate motor M8S paper butting plate motor clock sensor PI1S Check the paper butting plate motor Check the paper butting plate motor clock sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 751: ...ding edge sensor PI15S Check the paper butting plate motor Check the paper butting plate leading edge sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB E5F6 0005 Saddle butting error The paper butting plate leading edge sensordoesnot go on when the paper butting platemotorhas been drivenfor 0 3 sec Paper butting plate more M8S paper butting plate leading edge sensor PI15S Code Detail code Name Detection ...

Page 752: ...sor has been identified as being disconnected Connector of paper butting plate home positionsensor PI14S Connect the connector of the paper butting plate home position sensor Check the harness Replace the finisher controller PCB 0003 The connector of the paper butting plate leading edge sensor has been identified as being disconnected Connector of paper butting plate leading edge sensor PI15S Conn...

Page 753: ...sed inlet cover sensor PI9S nt cover open closed sensor PI2S delivery cover sensor PI3S Or the front over switch MS2S or the delivery cover switch MS3S is open Inlet cover switch MS1S front cover switch MS2S delivery cover switch MS3S Check the inlet cover switch Check the inlet cover sensor Check the front cover open closed sensor Check the delivery cover sensor Replace the finisher controller PC...

Page 754: ...ng their respective coversasbeing closed inlet cover sensor PI9S front cover open closed sensor PI2S delivery cover sensor PI3S front cover switch MS2S delivery cover switch MS3S Check the front cover switch Check the inlet cover sensor Check the front cover open closed sensor Check the delivery cover sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy ...

Page 755: ...dentifying their respective coversasbeing closed inlet cover sensor PI9S front cover open closed sensor PI2S delivery cover sensor PI3S delivery cover switch MS3S Check the delivery cover switch Check the inlet cover sensor Check the inlet cover sensor Check the front cover open closed sensor Check the delivery cover sensor Replace the finisher controller PCB Code Detail code Name Detection Remedy...

Page 756: ...tor Replace the reader controller PCB Replace the ADF controller PCB 0002 Reception status error Disconnect and then connect the connector Replace the reader control PCB Replace the ADF control PCB 0003 Reception interrupt error Disconnect and then connect the connector Replace the reader controlled PCB Replace the ADF controller PCB E490 0001 Wrong DF The installed DF is not of a supported type I...

Page 757: ...Chapter 16 Service Mode ...

Page 758: ......

Page 759: ... CON 16 15 16 3 3 R CON 16 19 16 3 4 FEEDER 16 21 16 3 5 SORTER 16 22 16 4 ADJUST 16 34 16 4 1 COPIER 16 34 16 4 1 1 Copier List 16 34 16 4 2 FEEDER 16 44 16 4 2 1 FEEDER List 16 44 16 4 3 SORTER 16 45 16 4 3 1 Sorter List 16 45 16 5 FUNCTION 16 46 16 5 1 COPIER 16 46 16 5 1 1 Copier List 16 46 16 5 2 FEEDER 16 59 16 5 2 1 Feeder List 16 59 16 6 OPTION 16 63 16 6 1 COPIER 16 63 16 6 1 1 Copier Lis...

Page 760: ...Contents 16 8 1 COPIER 16 102 16 8 1 1 Copier List 16 102 ...

Page 761: ...is divided into the following 7 types Initial screen Level 1 Main intermediate item screen Level 1 Sub item screen Level 1 Sub item screen Level 1 User screen Initial screen Level 2 Reset key Previous next page 2 8 Select a main item from the top of screen The corresponding intermediate items are then displayed and can be selected Select an item Main intermediate item screen Level 2 Sub item scree...

Page 762: ...ontrol panel 2 Press the 2 and 8 keys of the keypad at the same time 3 Press the asterisk key on the control panel In response to the foregoing key operations the machine will bring up the following Initial screen F 16 3 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD DISPLAY I O ADJUST FUNCTION OPTION TEST COUNTER status indication mode input output indication mode adjustment mode operation inspection mode settings m...

Page 763: ...alues are recorded in their respective service labels If you have replaced the reader controller PCB or the DC controller PCB or if you have initialized the RAM the adjustment values for ADJUST and OPTION will return to their default settings If there has been any change in a service mode item be sure to update its setting indicated on the service label As necessary make use of the space in the se...

Page 764: ...F 16 6 16 1 7 4th Item Screen 0007 8140 iR2270 iR2870 iR3570 iR4570 COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD Initial item Touch to select an item VERSION USER ACC STS ANALOG CST STS JAM ERR 2nd item Touch to select an item 3rd item Touch to select an item Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display ...

Page 765: ... absent ALERM alarm condition present READY JAM SERVICE WAITING DOOR COPYING ERROR Machine States Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O PREV NEXT OK xxxxx yyyyy aaaaa bbbbb toggles between and key press it to stop the ongoing operation stores input value numerical input range value before change Stop key press to clear an input Clear key press to start copying without leaving service mode Start ...

Page 766: ...DER ROM version of the DADF controller circuit board 1 SORTER ROM version of the finisher controller circuit board 1 FAX ROM version of the fax board 1 NIB Version of the network software 1 SDL STCH ROM version of the saddle stitcher controller circuit board 1 MN CONT ROM version of the main controller circuit board 1 DIAG DVC ROM version of the self diagnostic device 1 RUI Version of the remote U...

Page 767: ...Hungarian language file 2 LANG KO Version of the Korean language file 2 LANG NL Version of the Dutch language file 2 LANG NO Version of the Norwegian language file 2 LANG PL Version of the Polish language file 2 LANG PT Version of the Portuguese language file 2 LANG RU Version of the Russian language file 2 LANG SL Version of the Swedish language file 2 LANG SV Version of the Slovenian language fi...

Page 768: ... Connected 1 RAM Capacity of the memory on the main controller circuit board 256 MB 512 MB 1 COINROBO Coin vendor connection status 0 Not connected 1 Connected 1 NIB Network board connection status 0 No board connected 1 Ethernet board connected 2 Token ring board connected 3 Ethernet board and token ring board connected 1 PS PCL Not used 1 NETWARE Netware firmware installation status 0 Not instal...

Page 769: ...UM In machine humidity environment sensor Unit RH 1 ABS HUM Water content environment sensor Unit g 1 DR TEMP Photoconductor drum ambient temperature drum sensor Unit deg C 1 FIX C Fixing heater temperature main thermistor Unit deg C 1 FIX E Fixing heater edge temperature sub thermistor Unit deg C 1 COPIER DISPLAY CST STS Sub item Description Level WIDTH MF Paper width on the manual feedtray Unit ...

Page 770: ...creen No Jam sequential number 1 to 50 The oldest jam has the greatest number DATE Jam occurrence date TIME1 Jam occurrence time TIME2 Jam reset time L Location of the jam 0 2 0 host machine 1 Feeder 2 Finisher CODE Jam Code P Paper feed position 1 Cassette 1 2 Cassette 2 3 Cassette 3 4 Cassette 4 5 Side paper deck 6 Manual feed tray 7 Duplex section CNTR Software counter value of the paper feed s...

Page 771: ...inisher 3 Not used 4 Reader unit 5 Printer unit 6 Various PDL board 7 Fax board P Not used HV STS T 16 5 CCD COPIER DISPLAY HV STS Sub item Description Leve PRIMARY Primary charge current at photoconductor drum Registrationance detection control APVC Unit uA 1 TR Transfer current setting for the job executed last Unit uA 1 BIAS Developing bias setting for the job executed last Unit V 1 TR V Voltag...

Page 772: ...urrence ENVRNT Environmental log display Changes of In machine temperature deg C humidity Fixing roller surface center temperature deg C are displayed as log data COPIER DISPLAY CCD Sub item Description Level TARGET R Red shooting target value 2 OFST CCD offset level adjustment value 2 GAIN CCD gain level adjustment value 2 MFIL Main scan MTF correction index 2 SFIL Subscan MTF correction index 2 ...

Page 773: ...T 16 9 Item Description No Error sequential number The oldest error has the greatest number DATE Data acquisition date TIME Data acquisition time D deg C In machine temperature E In machine humidity F deg C Fixing roller surface temperature FEEDER DISPLAY Sub item Description Level FEEDSIZE Document size detected by the feeder 1 TRY WIDE Distance between document width detection slides Paper width...

Page 774: ...describe the items necessary items for market services only F 16 13 Screen interpretation F 16 14 Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display DC CON R CON FEEDER SORTER MN CONT Adjust Function Option Test Counter I O Display P001 P002 P003 P004 P005 P006 P007 P008 DC CON 1 3 READY xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx xxxxxxxx 0 7 ...

Page 775: ...velopment 8 15 Not used P002 0 1 For development 2 3 Not used 4 5 For development 6 Thermistor Overheat 0 Relay OFF 7 High voltage board high voltage reset detection 0 High voltage reset detection 8 15 Not used P003 0 7 For development 8 15 Not used P004 0 7 For development 8 15 Not used P005 0 5 Not used 6 High voltage board high voltage reset request 0 High voltage reset request 7 For developmen...

Page 776: ...up resistor switching 1 At low temperature 7 Fan half speed switching signal 1 Half speed 8 15 Not used P007 0 15 Not used P008 0 2 For development 3 Laser power select 4 Main motor 1 ON 5 7 For development 8 15 Not used P009 0 5 Not used 6 Polygon motor acceleration signal 7 15 For development P010 0 7 Not used P011 0 7 Not used P012 0 7 Not used P013 0 7 Not used P014 0 7 Not used P015 0 7 Not u...

Page 777: ... light 4 First paper ejection motor current switching 0 5 First paper ejection motor current switching 1 6 Heat exhaust fan F 1 ON 7 Pre exposure light quantity switching 1 Pre exposure with medium quantity of light P021 0 Manual feed detection sensor 0 Paper present 1 Toner detection 1 Toner remaining 2 Duplex transport sensor 1 Detected 3 Heat exhaust fan F lock detection 0 Locked 4 7 For develo...

Page 778: ...nt P028 0 4 For development 5 Cassette 1 paper sensor 1 No paper 6 Cassette 1 paper level A sensor 1 Half or less 7 Cassette 1 paper level B sensor 1 About 50 sheets or less P029 0 First paper ejection sensor 1 Detected 1 First paper ejection full sensor 0 Full 2 Fused paper ejection sensor 1 Detected 3 Front door sensor 0 OPEN 4 7 For development P030 0 1 For development 2 Paper feed door sensor ...

Page 779: ... sensor drive signal 1 ON P002 0 Not used 1 24V power supply monitor signal 0 Normal 2 Optical motor drive signal 1 Forward 0 Reverse 3 For development 4 For development 5 13V power supply monitor signal 0 Normal 6 Not used 7 For development P003 0 For development 1 For development 2 For development 3 For development 4 LED control signal 1 ON 5 For development 6 None 7 None P004 0 Document size de...

Page 780: ...ation 5 Platen sensor interrupt input 0 1 Platen closed 6 HP sensor interrupt input 1 HP 7 Platen sensor interrupt input 1 1 Platen closed P007 0 For development 1 For development 2 For development 3 For development 4 Optical motor driver power saving 0 active 5 ADF feed motor clock interrupt input Repetition of 0 1 6 ADF read motor clock interrupt input Repetition of 0 1 7 Not used P008 0 Lamp ON...

Page 781: ... contents Remarks P001 0 Read sensor 1 Detected 1 Pre registration sensor 1 Detected P002 0 1 2 3 4 Stamp solenoid 1 ON 5 Clutch 1 ON 6 Document load LED 1 ON 7 P003 0 7 P004 0 Document detection sensor 1 Document present 1 Cover sensor 1 Closed 2 3 4 5 For development 6 For development 7 For development P005 0 End sensor 1 Paper present Address Bit Address Remarks ...

Page 782: ...7 P010 0 7 For development P011 0 7 For development Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s P001 STACKER 0 Entry transport motor A 1 Entry transport motor B 2 Entry transport motor A 3 Entry transport motor B 4 Entry transport motor current switching 0 0 ON 5 Entry transport motor current switching 1 0 ON 6 Entry transport bundle ejection motor standby signal 1 ON 7 Common solenoid ON sig...

Page 783: ... 3 For development 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used P004 STACKER 0 Saddle connection detection signal 0 ON 1 Not used 2 Oscillating HP sensor 1 ON 3 Top cover sensor 0 ON 4 Front cover sensor 0 ON 5 Front cover interlock sensor 1 ON 6 Gear change HP sensor 1 ON 7 Not used P005 STACKER 0 For development 1 For development 2 Punch send request signal 0 ON 3 Saddle 13VON signal 1 ON 4 Not u...

Page 784: ...clock input P008 STACKER 0 Tray 3 paper detection sensor 1 ON 1 Tray 3 connection sensor 0 ON 2 High quality paper sensor 1 ON 3 Tray 1 interlock detection sensor 1 ON 4 Tray 1 area sensor 1 0 ON 5 Tray 1 area sensor 2 0 ON 6 Tray 1 area sensor 3 0 ON 7 Tray 1 paper detection sensor 1 ON P009 STACKER 0 Tray 1 shift motor CW 0 ON 1 Tray 1 shift motor enable 1 ON 2 Tray 1 shift motor power switching...

Page 785: ...aced solenoid 1 ON 4 Transport path sensor 1 ON 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used P012 STACKER 0 Gear change phase A 1 Gear change phase B 2 Gear change motor current switching 0 0 ON 3 Gear change motor current switching 1 0 ON 4 Not used 5 For development 6 For development 7 For development P013 STACKER 0 For development 1 Pre alignment HP sensor 1 ON 2 Pre alignment HP sensor 1 ON 3 Processing t...

Page 786: ...lignment phase B 2 Pre alignment motor current switching 0 0 ON 3 Not used 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s P016 STACKER 0 Rear end assist phase A 1 Rear end assist phase B 2 Rear end assist motor current switching 0 0 ON 3 Rear end assist motor current switching 1 0 ON 4 Rear end assist standby 1 ON 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used Addre...

Page 787: ...STACKER 0 Stapler slide current switching 0 0 ON 1 Stapler slide current switching 1 0 ON 2 Under bundle roller clutch 1 ON 3 Shutter clutch 1 ON 4 First paper ejection roller spaced solenoid 1 ON 5 Buffer paper rear end press solenoid 1 ON 6 Bundle out motor current switching 1 0 ON 7 Bundle out motor current switching 0 0 ON P020 STACKER 0 Bundle out motor phase A 1 Bundle out motor phase B 2 Bu...

Page 788: ... signal 0 ON 6 Not used 7 Fan error detection signal 0 ON P023 STACKER 0 FAN ON 1 ON 1 LED1 0 ON 2 LED2 0 ON 3 LED3 0 ON 4 FIN internal power supply ON 0 ON 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Return roller spaced solenoid 0 ON P024 SADDLE 0 Guide motor phase A 1 Guide motor phase B 2 Guide motor current switching 0 ON 3 Saddle transport motor current switching 4 Saddle transport motor phase A 5 Saddle transp...

Page 789: ...ed 7 Not used P027 SADDLE 0 Stapler current detection signal 1 ON 1 Stapler current detection signal 1 ON 2 Paper ejection cover sensor connector open 0 ON 3 Front cover sensor connector open 0 ON 4 Butting plate HP connector open 0 ON 5 Folding roller guide HP connector open 0 ON 6 Saddle stapler unit connector open 0 ON 7 Butting plate TOP connector open 0 ON P028 SADDLE 0 Inside staple detectio...

Page 790: ...r 1 ON 2 Entry cover open detection 0 ON 3 Saddle stapler open detection 1 ON 4 Butting plate HP sensor 1 ON 5 Butting plate TOP sensor 1 ON 6 Not used 7 Transport clock Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s P031 SADDLE 0 Saddle tray paper detection sensor 0 ON 1 Paper positioning section paper detection sensor 0 ON 2 Crescent roller HP sensor 0 ON 3 Saddle paper ejection path sensor 0 ...

Page 791: ...switching flapper 1 1 ON 2 Saddle path switching flapper 2 1 ON 3 Intermediate transport solenoid 1 ON 4 Not used 5 Not used 6 Entry path sensor 1 ON 7 Not used P034 SADDLE 0 Inside stapler motor forward rotation 0 ON 1 Inside stapler motor reverse rotation 0 ON 2 Front stapler motor forward rotation 0 ON 3 Not used 4 Folding roller HP connector open 0 ON 5 Not used 6 Not used 7 Not used P035 SADD...

Page 792: ... ON 1 LED1 1 ON 2 LED2 1 ON 3 LED3 1 ON 4 LEDY 0 ON 5 TRAY_MTR_CUR 0 ON 6 TRAY_MTR_B 0 ON 7 TRAY_MTR_A 0 ON P038 PUNCHER 0 DIPSW1 0 ON 1 DIPSW2 0 ON 2 DIPSW3 0 ON 3 4 PCH OUT 5 Rear end sensor 1 ON 6 Punch encoder clock 7 Punch HP sensor 0 ON P039 PUNCHER 0 For development 1 For development 2 For development 3 4 5 6 7 Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s ...

Page 793: ...otor CCW 0 ON 7 Punch motor CW 0 ON P041 PUNCHER 0 1 2 3 4 DIPSW4 0 ON 5 Horizontal registration motor CUR 0 ON 6 For development 7 P042 PUNCHER 0 LED1 0 ON 1 For development 2 For development 3 LED2 0 ON 4 Front cover sensor 0 ON 5 For development 6 PUSHSW2 0 ON 7 PUSHSW1 0 ON P043 PUNCHER 0 1 2 3 4 5 Top cover sensor 0 ON 6 7 Address Controller Bit Display contents Remark s ...

Page 794: ...ontroller circuit board has been cleared enter the value from the service label COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY Sub item Description Level Adjusting the mage read start position If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label If the setting of this item has been changed enter the new value into the service label ADJ X...

Page 795: ...orward ADJ Y DF Adjusting the main scan position at DF flow read 1 Setting range 50 to 250 Default 144 Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0 1 mm outward STRD_POS Adjusting the CCD read start position at DF flow read 1 Setting range 1 to 200 Default 100 Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0 1 mm to left COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY Sub item Description...

Page 796: ...hen DF is in use Ordinary document read position 1 Setting range 1 to 2047 Default 1106 If an image error attributable to a dirty chart or other has occurred after the execution of COPIER FUNCTION DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 enter factory measurement data in this mode DFTAR2 R Entering a shading target value red when DF is in use Secondary document read position 1 Setting range 1 to 2047 Default 1138 If an ...

Page 797: ... unit displacement Matching the laser main scan 1 Setting range 360 to 440 Enter the delay value peculiar to the unit affixed to the unit at laser unit replacement POWER Adjusting the laser power 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP Sub item ...

Page 798: ...IER ADJUST BLANK Sub item Description Level BLANK T Entering an adjustment value for the chipping width at the front of an image 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 Setting a greater value increases the chipping width If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label BLANK B Entering an adjustment value for the ...

Page 799: ...e value from the label affixed to the casing of the new compound power circuit board COPIER ADJUST HV TR Sub item Description Level TR OFST Entering an output adjustment value for transfer charge current offset 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label TR SPP Entering ...

Page 800: ... 2 thick paper 3 envelope 4 tracing paper 5 OHP transparency 6 Postcard 7 Label paper 8 Bond paper TR ENV1 to TR ENV8 Setting environment at ATVC setting 2 Setting range 1 to 3 1 Category A low temperature Default 2 Category B room temperature 3 Category C high temperature TR DUP1 to TR DUP8 Setting simplex paper feed mode at ATVC setting 2 Setting range 1to 4 1 Simplex Default 2 Auto duplex feed ...

Page 801: ...the registration loop amount at duplex paper feed 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 45 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label RG HF SP Adjusting the registration clutch ON timing 1 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has bee...

Page 802: ...tering the basic paper width of the manual feed tray A6R 1 Setting range 0 to 1024 Default 175 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label For replacing the paper with detection VR or registering a new value for the firs time this service mode shall be executed by FUNCTION CST MF A4 Entering the basic paper...

Page 803: ...rd itself has been replaced enter the value from the service label FX FL LW Entering a fine adjustment value for the fixing film speed when low speed plain paper is used Make a fine adjustment of the target control speed for the fixing film speed when low speed plain paper is used 2 Setting range 3 to 3 Default 0 Unit ms If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itsel...

Page 804: ...Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 DK ADJ Y Entering a horizontal registration adjustment value for the side paper deck Enter a laser write start position for paper fed from the side paper deck according to the registered numeric value 2 Setting range 128 to 127 Default 0 FRAME X Entering a fine adjustment value in the subscan direction for zooming Enter an image zooming value in the subscan direc...

Page 805: ...tory adjustment value Value after RAM clearance 0 LA SPEED Adjusting the document transport speed at feeder flow read Adjustment method Setting a greater value increases the speed Reducing the image 1 Setting range 30 to 30 Value at shipping Factory adjustment value Value after RAM clearance 0 SORTER ADJUST Sub item Description Level PNCH HLE Adjusting the distance from the paper end to the punche...

Page 806: ...loper is replaced Therefore this message is not necessary when the machine is shipped with the developer for installation STRD POS Automatically adjusting the CCD read position at flow read This is necessary when DF is installed and when ADF is removed and mounted again 1 Operating procedure 1 Select an item to reverse its display Then press the OK key Adjustment automatically starts and stops 2 S...

Page 807: ...atic adjustment ends with OK displayed on the screen 5 Since all items are updated in this service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD enter the values into the service label DF WLVL1 2 Adjusting the ADF white level Platen scan Flow read scan 1 Operating procedure 1 Place the user s usual paper on the document table and execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 Read the white level in Book mode to check the transpa...

Page 808: ...e execute this mode to adjust the density automatically 1 Operating procedure 1 Select PD DENS to reverse its display Then press the OK key 2 Paper is fed from Cassette 2 and a 17 tone print pattern is output This print pattern is used by PD ME Automatically adjusting the density in Character mode Reading PD DENS output pattern 1 Operating procedure 1 Set the PD DENS output pattern on the document...

Page 809: ...g one blank copy 3 Select DISPLAY HV STS PRIMARY to display the measurement results COPIER FUNCTION CST Sub item Description Level MF A4R MF A6R MF A4 Registering the basic paper width of the manual feeder DADF A4R width 210 mm A6R width 105 mm A4 width 297 mm For micro adjustment after basic width registration select MF A4R MF A6R or MF A4 from COP COPIER ADJUST CST ADJ 1 Operating procedure 1 Pl...

Page 810: ...ted paper conforms to the standard Note This machine does not allow nip width adjustment This item is used for nip width checking only COPIER FUNCTION PANEL Sub item Description Level LCD CHK Checking the LCD display for missing dots 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key to start operation The front of the panel lights repeatedly in order of white black red green and blue C...

Page 811: ... the coordinate positions on the analog touchpanel 1 Operating procedure Align the press positions on the touchpanel and the coordinate positions on the LCD section If the LCD section has been replaced execute this service mode 1 Select TOUCHCHK to reverse its display Then press the OK key 2 Press sequentially the nine positive signs that appear on the touchpanel in order Key Screen Display 0 to 9...

Page 812: ... 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Enter the code of the motor from the ten key pad 3 Press the OK key 4 Press MTR ON to check its operation MTR ON Starting the motor operation check 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key to repeat ON and OFF in the following pattern 20 second ON OFF SL Specifying a solenoid to check its operation Range 1 to 9 1 Operating procedure ...

Page 813: ...d motor cassette pedestal M2 4 First paper ejection motor M4 12 Deck paper feed motor deck M1 5 Bottle rotation motor M5 13 Deck lifter motor deck M2 6 Cassette 1 paper feed motor M6 14 Second paper ejection motor 2 3 paper ejection M1 7 Cassette 2 paper feed motor M7 15 Third paper ejection motor 2 3 paper ejection M2 8 Duplex motor iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F only M10 16 Buffer pass motor M1 1 Casse...

Page 814: ...ontroller circuit board The RAM is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON 1 Operating procedure 1 Select COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT to print out the contents of the service mode 2 Select this item and press the OK key 3 Turn the main power switch OFF and ON 4 Enter the P PRINT output data as required JAM HIST Clearing the jam history The jam history is cleared when the OK key ...

Page 815: ...NTER DRBL 2 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key OPTION Resetting a service mode OPTION to default values after RAM clearance The service mode is reset when the OK key is pressed This clears data in the main controller DC controller and reader controller 1 Operating procedure 1 Select COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT to print the contents of the service mode 2 Select this it...

Page 816: ...M Clearing the alarm log The alarm log is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key 2 Turn the main power switch OFF and ON SLT CLR Clearing the salutation setting 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item and press the OK key SND STUP Clearing the send read settings The send read settings are cleared when the main power sw...

Page 817: ...g USER PRT Printing out the user mode list 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key to start printing LBL PRNT Printing out the service label 1 Operating procedure 1 Load A4 or LTR paper on Cassette 1 2 Select this item 3 Press the OK key to start printing PRE EXP Checking the pre exposure lamp LED 1 Operating procedure 1 Press this item to reverse its display 2 Press the OK key...

Page 818: ...1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key to start printing KEY HIST Printing out the operating section key input history 2 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key to start printing HIST PRT Printing out the jam history and error history 2 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key to start printing TRS DATA Transferring memory received data to the box 2 Operating proc...

Page 819: ...a management information storage area 3 PDL related file storage area 4 Firmware address book file storage area 5 MEAP area 6 Address book area Remarks HD CLEAR shall be indispensable for 4 and 6 HD CHECK Checking and restoring the partition specified by CHK TYPE 1 Operating procedure 1 Select this item 2 Press the OK key 3 The result 1 OK 2 NG hardware 3 NG software restored alternative sector is...

Page 820: ...justing document width detection by DF A5R width 1 TRY LTR Automatically adjusting document width detection by DF LTR width 1 TRY LTRR Automatically adjusting document width detection by DF LTRR width 1 FEED CHK Checking ADF paper feed operation 1 Operating procedure 1 Press FEED CHK to reverse its display 2 Enter a part corresponding number from the ten key pad 3 Press the OK key 4 Press FEED ON ...

Page 821: ...g procedure 1 Press SL CHK to reverse its display 2 Enter a part corresponding number from the ten key pad 3 Press the OK key 4 Press SL ON to check ADF solenoid operation Part corresponding number 0 Pressurizing solenoid 1 Stamping solenoid Value at shipping Factory adjustment value Value after RAM clearance 0 SL ON Starting solenoid operation 1 Operating procedure Operation specifications shall ...

Page 822: ...DF roller 1 While the roller is being rotated automatically by a motor press alcohol moistened lens cleaning paper against the roller for cleaning Operating procedure 1 Press ROLL CLN to reverse its display 2 While the roller is rotating press alcohol moistened lens cleaning paper against the roller for cleaning 3 Press ROLL CLN to reverse its display Press the OK key to stop the roller FEED ON Ch...

Page 823: ...er down sequence table 1 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 Priority to productivity control temperature fixed at 10deg C 2 Control temperature fixed at 6deg C 3 Control temperature fixed at 3deg C 4 Priority to fixing control temperature fixed at 3deg C 5 Control temperature fixed at 6deg C 6 Control temperature fixed at 10deg C 7 Control temperature fixed at 15deg C TRANS SW Switching transfer high v...

Page 824: ... Note This setting is cleared if APVC is executed with a new drum unit or if a service mode FUNCTION D GAMMA is executed 1 Setting range 0 No UP Default 1 50 mA UP 2 100 mA UP TEMPCON2 Improving fixing Increasing the fixing temperature Note Valid for iR3570 3570F 4570 4570F only 1 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 Priority to productivity control temperature fixed at 10deg C 2 Control temperature fixe...

Page 825: ...urn the main power switch OFF and ON W SCNR Setting whether a scanner is present Copy model 1 Setting range 0 Printer model Default 1 Model with scanner FTPTXPN Specifying the send destination port FTP number 1 Setting range 0 to 65535 Default 21 DFDST L1 Adjusting the dust detection level when DF is used Inter paper correction Setting a greater value makes it easy to detect even small particles 1...

Page 826: ... Count B4 as the small size Default 1 Count B4 as the large size FIX CLN Setting the timing at which the fixing pressure roller is cleaned 2 Setting range 0 No cleaning Default 1 Once every 500 sheets at 225deg C regulated temperature and 60 second idling 2 Once every 200 sheets at 225deg C regulated temperature and 60 second idling 3 Once every 100 sheets at 225deg C regulated temperature and 60 ...

Page 827: ...is used to isolate the data contents and image processing 2 Setting range 0 Usual operation Default 1 Print out with no change SHARP Changing the sharpness level Setting the central value 2 Setting range 1 to 5 Default 3 COTDPC D Saving the toner Potential VD low 2 Setting range 0 No saving Default 1 Down about 10 2 Down about 20 3 Down about 30 RMT LANG Changing the remote UI language from web 2 ...

Page 828: ...eserved FAN EXTN Setting the post job fan extension mode 2 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 ON SMTPTXPN Changing the SMTP send port number 2 Setting range 0 to 65535 units of 1 Default 25 SMTPRXPN Changing the SMTP send port number 2 Setting range 0 to 65535 units of 1 Default 25 POP3PN Changing the POP receive port number 2 Setting range 0 to 65535 units of 1 Default 110 RUI DSP Setting whether to d...

Page 829: ... by DF This is targeted at LTR notified of by DF DF 2 Setting range 0 LTR Default 1 G LTR 2 A LTR 3 EXECTIVE 4 LTR ORG LTRR Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF This is targeted at LTR R notified of by DF 2 Setting range 0 LTR R Default 1 G LTR R 2 A LTR R 3 OFFICIO 4 E OFFICIO 5 EXECTIVE R 6 LTR R ORG LDR Setting a special paper size that cannot be recognized by DF This is...

Page 830: ...Default UI FAX Setting whether or not to display the fax screen of the operating section 2 Setting range 0 Do not display 1 Display Default UI EXT Setting whether or not to display the extended screen of the operating section 2 Setting range 0 Do not display 1 Display Default NEGA GST Making additional setting about the pre exposure sequence excluding laser 2 Setting range 0 Environmental control ...

Page 831: ...TP server Default 1 Do not use NS GSAPI Limiting the use of GSSAPI in SMTP authentication This is set to limit the use of GSSAPI in SMTP authentication 2 Setting range 0 Dependent on the SMTP server Default 1 Do not use NS NTLM Limiting the use of NTLM in SMTP authentication This is set to limit the use of NTLM in SMTP authentication 2 Setting range 0 Dependent on the SMTP server Default 1 Do not ...

Page 832: ...t 1 Do not use MEAP PN Changing the HTTP port number of the MEAP application 2 Setting range 0 to 65535 Default 8000 SVMD ENT Switching how to enter service mode 2 0 User mode key Simultaneous press of 2 and User mode Default 1 User mode key Simultaneous press of 4 and 9 User mode SSH SW Turning the SSH server function ON or OFF 2 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 ON RMT LGIN Turning remote login to t...

Page 833: ...T status connection port number 2 Setting range 1 to 65535 Default 20000 MEAP DSP Turning screen transition from MEAP to Native ON or OFF 2 Setting range 0 OFF Transition to the Native screen Default 1 ON No transition to the Native screen ANIM SW Turn MEAP application error jam screen display ON or OFF 2 Setting range 0 OFF Display warning screen Default 1 ON Do not display warning screen MEAP SS...

Page 834: ... at shipping Value after RAM clearance 101 Cannot be changed COUNTER2to 6 Setting Software counters 2 to 6 on the User mode screen 1 Setting range 0 to 999 CONTROL Limiting the user of a control card for a PDL job 1 Setting range 0 Do not use Default 1 Use B4 L CNT Setting whether to count B4 as the large size or the small size on Software counters 1 to 6 1 Setting range 0 Small size Default 1 Lar...

Page 835: ...lPrint and PDLPrint in the PRINT category 1 Counting ReportPrint SendLocalPrint and PDLPrint in the PRINT category CNT SW Switching the charging counter and default display items 1 Setting range When the set value is 0 Default 101 Total 1 When the set value is 1 102 Total 2 202 Copy total 2 127 Total A Total 2 When the set value is 2 101 Total 1 104 Total small 103 Total large 501 Scan total 1 REM...

Page 836: ...No Default 1 Yes TRY STP Setting output or no output in the tray full state 2 Setting range 0 Ordinary mode Interrupt when the finisher tray is full Default 1 Interrupt by height detection only MF LG ST Setting the long mode key 2 Setting range 0 Ordinary Default 1 Display a long mode key on the corresponding mode screen CNT DISP Setting whether or not to display a serial number when the counter c...

Page 837: ...utside Japan HDCR DSP Setting whether or not display HDD clearance in User mode and changing the contents of clearance 2 Setting range 1 Clear once with 0 Default 2 Clear once with random data 3 Clear three times with random data JOB INVL Setting the job interval at interrupt 2 Setting range 0 Output the next job continuously in interrupt copying Standard Default 1 Start outputting the next job af...

Page 838: ...m RUI by three authentication failures 2 Setting procedure 0 Invalid Default 1 Valid CTM S06 Setting whether or not to erase the password from the export file of the file send address 2 Setting range 0 Do not erase the password from the export file Default 1 Erase the password from the export file CTM S07 Setting whether or not to erase the RUI address display or the send password source display o...

Page 839: ...mit split send in IFAX Simple mode transmission AFN PSWD Limiting access in User mode 2 Setting range 0 OFF Transition to the User mode screen with no password request Default 1 ON Transition to the User mode screen after password matching PTJAM RC Turning PDL jam recovery ON or OFF 2 Setting range 0 OFF Do not recover 1 ON Recover Default SLP SLCT Setting whether or not to use a network applicati...

Page 840: ...et as the large size Total A Total excluding local and remote copies Total B Total excluding local and remote copies and box prints Copy Local and remote copies Copy A Local and remote copies and box prints Print PDL report and box prints Print A PDL and report prints Scan Black and white and color scans T 16 50 No Counter Description Support 101 Total 1 yes 102 Total 2 yes 103 Total Large yes 104...

Page 841: ... A Full color 1 131 Total A Full color 2 132 Total A Black and white 1 yes 133 Total A Black and white 2 yes 134 Total A Monochrome Large 135 Total A Monochrome Small 136 Total A Black and white Large yes 137 Total A Black and white Small yes 138 Total A1 Duplex 139 Total A2 Duplex 140 Large A Duplex 141 Small A Duplex 142 Total A Monochrome 1 143 Total A Monochrome 2 144 Total A Full color Large ...

Page 842: ...white Small yes 162 Total B1 Duplex 163 Total B2 Duplex 164 Large B Duplex 165 Small B Duplex 166 Total B Monochrome 1 167 Total B Monochrome 2 168 Total B Full color Large 169 Total B Full color Small 170 Total B Full color Monochrome Large 171 Total B Full color Monochrome Small 172 Total B Full color Monochrome 2 173 Total B Full color Monochrome 1 201 Copy Total 1 yes 202 Copy Total 2 yes 203 ...

Page 843: ...Copy Full color Small 225 Copy Monochrome Large 226 Copy Monochrome Small 227 Copy Black and white Large yes 228 Copy Black and white Small yes 229 Copy Full color Monochrome Large 230 Copy Full color Monochrome Small 231 Copy Full color Monochrome 2 232 Copy Full color Monochrome 1 233 Copy Full color Large Duplex 234 Copy Full color Small Duplex 235 Copy Monochrome Large Duplex 236 Copy Monochro...

Page 844: ...lor Small Duplex 263 Copy A Monochrome Large Duplex 264 Copy A Monochrome Small Duplex 265 Copy A Black and white Large Duplex 266 Copy A Black and white Small Duplex 273 Local copy Full color 1 274 Local copy Full color 2 275 Local copy Monochrome 1 276 Local copy Monochrome 2 277 Local copy Black and white 1 yes 278 Local copy Black and white 2 yes 279 Local copy Full color Large 280 Local copy ...

Page 845: ...mote copy Full color Large 009 Remote copy Full color Small 010 Remote copy Monochrome Large 011 Remote copy Monochrome Small 012 Remote copy Black and white Large yes 013 Remote copy Black and white Small yes 014 Remote copy Full color Monochrome Large 015 Remote copy Full color Monochrome Small 016 Remote copy Full color Monochrome 2 017 Remote copy Full color Monochrome 1 018 Remote copy Full c...

Page 846: ...d white Large yes 320 Print Black and white Small yes 321 Print Full color Monochrome Large 322 Print Full color Monochrome Small 323 Print Full color Monochrome 2 324 Print Full color Monochrome 1 325 Print Full color Large Duplex 326 Print Full color Small Duplex 327 Print Monochrome Large Duplex 328 Print Monochrome Small Duplex 329 Print Black and white Large Duplex 330 Print Black and white S...

Page 847: ...y Print Monochrome Small 405 Copy Print Monochrome 2 406 Copy Print Monochrome 1 407 Copy Print Full color Monochrome Large 408 Copy Print Full color Monochrome Small 409 Copy Print Full color Monochrome 2 410 Copy Print Full color Monochrome 1 411 Copy Print Large 412 Copy Print Small 413 Copy Print 2 414 Copy Print 1 415 Copy Print Monochrome Large 416 Copy Print Monochrome Small 417 Copy Print ...

Page 848: ...6 Box print Full color 2 607 Box print Monochrome 1 608 Box print Monochrome 2 609 Box print Black and white 1 yes 610 Box print Black and white 2 yes 611 Box print Full color Large 612 Box print Full color Small 613 Box print Monochrome Large 614 Box print Monochrome Small 615 Box print Black and white Large yes 616 Box print Black and white Small yes 617 Box print Full color Monochrome Large 618...

Page 849: ...ve print Full color Small 713 Receive print Gray scale Large 714 Receive print Gray scale Small 715 Receive print Monochrome Large yes 716 Receive print Monochrome Small yes 717 Receive print Full color Gray scale Large 718 Receive print Full color Gray scale Small 719 Receive print Full color Gray scale 2 720 Receive print Full color Gray scale 1 721 Receive print Full color Large Duplex 722 Rece...

Page 850: ...Gray scale Small 819 Report print Full color Gray scale 2 820 Report print Full color Gray scale 1 821 Report print Full color Large Duplex 822 Report print Full color Small Duplex 823 Report print Gray scale Large Duplex 824 Report print Gray scale Small Duplex 825 Report print Monochrome Large Duplex 826 Report print Monochrome Small Duplex 901 Copy scan total 1 Color 902 Copy scan total 1 Black...

Page 851: ...can total 6 Black and white yes 931 Send scan total 7 Color 932 Send scan total 7 Black and white 933 Send scan total 8 Color 934 Send scan total 8 Black and white 935 Universal send scan total Color 936 Universal send scan total Black and white 937 Box scan Color 938 Box scan Black and white 939 Remote scan Color 940 Remote scan Black and white yes 941 Send scan FAX Color 942 Send scan FAX Black ...

Page 852: ...lor 958 Send scan Box Black and white COPIER OPTION CST Sub item Description Level ENV1 2 Registering Envelope cassette ENV1 2 1 Setting range 21 ISO C5 Default 22 COM10 23 Monarch 24 DL 25 ISO B5 26 Western style No 4 U1 NAMEto U4 NAME Setting whether or not to display a paper name when a paper size group U1 to U4 has been detected 2 Setting range 0 Display U1 U2 U3 or U4 on the touchpanel 1 Disp...

Page 853: ...8 Bolivian OFFICIO 29 Argentine LETTER U4 Default 30 Argentine LETTER R 31 Governmental LETTER U1 Default 32 Governmental LETTER R 34 Governmental LEGAL U3 Default 35 FOLIO 36 Argentine OFFICIO 37 Mexican OFFICIO 38 EXECUTIVE COPIER OPTION ACC Sub item Description Level COIN Switching the coin vendor Set whether the coin vendor management mode can be entered or not 1 Setting range 0 OFF Default 1 ...

Page 854: ...ONT Setting the EFI controller connection 1 Setting range 0 Usual operation Default AP OPT Permitting or prohibiting printing from the PrintMe application installed in the PS print server unit 2 Setting range 0 Permit printing by a specified account 1 Permit printing irrespective of the account Default 2 Prohibit printing except by specified department ID AP ACCNT Setting a department ID for a pri...

Page 855: ...per Default 2 Thick paper 3 Envelope 4 tracing paper 5 OHP transparency 6 Postcard 7 Label paper 8 Bond paper MOD SLCT Setting a paper mode for weak bias to the transfer tip 1 Setting range 1 Simplex Default 2 Automatic duplex feed Second side Cassette feed 3 Manual duplex feed Second side Manual feed ENV SLCT Setting the environment for weak bias to the transfer tip 1 Setting range 1 to 5 Default...

Page 856: ...LIPS installation status in transfer invalidation and executing transfer invalidation 2 TR LIPS Acquiring a transfer license key for LIPS in transfer invalidation 2 ST PDFDR Displaying the PDF direct function installation status in transfer invalidation and executing transfer invalidation 2 TR PDFDR Acquiring a transfer license key for the PDF direct function in transfer invalidation 2 ST SCR Disp...

Page 857: ...to detect a mixed document of A B size and inch size 1 Setting value 0 Do not detect Default 1 Detect SORTER OPTION Sub item Description Level BLNK SW Setting the margin width W on each side of the folding position when the saddle stitcher is used 1 Setting value 0 Ordinary width 5 mm 1 Large width 10 mm Value at shipping Value after RAM clearance 1 MD SPRTN Setting the finisher function limit 1 S...

Page 858: ...NTDL Setting whether or not to display the font service setting screen for list display by the PS kanji font downloader 1 Setting value 0 Do not display Default 1 Display MENU 1 to MENU 4 Setting whether or not to display Levels 1 to 4 of the printer setting menu 2 Setting value 0 Do not display 1 Display Value at shipping Value after RAM clearance 0 ...

Page 859: ...Totally white 00H 5 Halftone 80H Error diffusion method T0BIC 6 Halftone 80H Dither screen method 7 Totally black FFH 8 Horizontal line space 27 dots line width 40 dots 9 Horizontal line space 50 dots line width 60 dots 10 Horizontal line space 3 dots line width 2 dots 11 Halftone 60H Error diffusion method T0BIC 12 Halftone 60H Dither screen method 13 Halftone 30H Error diffusion method T0BIC 14 ...

Page 860: ... key and the Start key If NG is displayed the TCP IP setting of the local machine may be wrong Return to Step 3 and check the setting again If OK is displayed the TCP IP setting of the local machine seems correct but the network controller main controller circuit board may be faulty Check the controller at Step 7 Since the loopback address signal is returned before the network controller the TCP I...

Page 861: ...blems about the network setting of the local machine or the network controller Then the problem may be attributable to the user network environment Report this to the system administrator and request action F 16 17 Result OK NG IP address input ...

Page 862: ...0000000 1 COPY Total copy counter This counter is incremented when a copy is created and ejected out of the printer After 99999999 the count returns to 00000000 1 PDL PRT PDL print counter This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in PDL printing The increment is 0 for blank print and 5 each for a la...

Page 863: ...counter This counter is incremented with the charging counter when a print is ejected out of the machine or loaded again for printing the other side in report printing The increment is 0 for blank print and 1each for a large or small print The count can be cleared After 99999999 the count returns to 00000000 1 2 SIDE Duplex copy print counter This counter is incremented with the charging counter w...

Page 864: ...he number of sheets fed from the deck paper feed unit is displayed Irrespective of the paper size large or small this counter is incremented one After 99999999 the count returns to 00000000 1 2 SIDE Duplex paper feed total counter The number of duplex fed sheets is displayed Irrespective of the paper size large or small this counter is incremented one After 99999999 the count returns to 00000000 1...

Page 865: ...m Description Level LSR MTR Scanner motor counter This counter counts motor rotations If the time until the motor run become stable is shorter than the average however this counter is not incremented Average time iR2230 2870 About 1 3 seconds iR3570 4570 About 3 3 seconds 1 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 Sub item Description Level TR ROLL Transfer roller counter Irrespective of the paper size large or smal...

Page 866: ...his counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size 1 FX LW RL Lower fixing roller counter This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size 1 FX FILM Fixing film counter This counter is incremented two for the large size and one for the small size 1 FX CL RL Fixing cleaning roller counter This counter is incremented two for the large size and o...

Page 867: ...d duplex mode 1 DF FD RL ADF transport roller counter Irrespective of the paper size large or small this counter is incremented one for each document in simplex mode and three for each read document front back and idle transfer in duplex mode 1 LNT TAPE ADF dust collection tape counter Irrespective of the paper size large or small this counter is incremented one for each read document not side bot...

Page 868: ...ter 1 SADDL E Saddle paper transport counter The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other 1 SDL STPL Saddle stapling counter 1 PUNCH Punching counter 1 FN BFFRL Buffer roller counter The large and small sizes are not distinguished from each other 1 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 Sub item Description Level ...

Page 869: ...Chapter 17 Service Tools ...

Page 870: ......

Page 871: ...Contents Contents 17 1 Special Tools 17 1 17 2 Oils and Solvents 17 2 ...

Page 872: ......

Page 873: ...y one B each group of 5 service engineers is expected to carry one C each workshop is expected to carry one Tool name Tool No Ran k Shape Uses Digital multimeter FY9 2002 A For making electrical checks Cover switch TKN 0093 A Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A As an addition when making an electrical check Tester extension pin L shipped FY9 3039 A As an addition when making an electrical check NA 3 T...

Page 874: ...lcohol may be substituted Solvent cleaning e g metal soiling with oil or toner fluorine family hydrocarbon chlorine family hydrocarbon alcohol Do not bring near fire Procure locally MEK may be substituted Lubricant mineral oil paraffin family CK 0524 100 cc Lubricant drive mechanism sliding mechanism silicone oil CK 0551 20 g Lubricant EM 50L gear special oil special solid lubricating agent lithiu...

Page 875: ...Oct 8 2004 ...

Page 876: ......

Reviews:

No comments

Brands by name

Popular brands

Load more brands